Anda di halaman 1dari 313

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ART 2000
COLOR WEATHER RADAR ANTENNA/RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER

MANUAL NUMBER 006-05332-0003 REVISION 3, JUNE, 2002

WARNING PRIOR THE EXPORT OF THIS DOCUMENT, REVIEW FOR EXPORT LICENSE REQUIREMENT IS NEEDED.

COPYRIGHT NOTICE 2000,2002 HONEYWELL INTL. INC.

Reproduction of this publication or any portion thereof by any means without the express written permission of Honeywell Internatonal Inc. is prohibited. For further information contact the Manager, Technical Publications, Honeywell International Inc., ONE TECHNOLOGY CENTER, 23500 West 105th Street, Olathe KS 66061 Telephone: (913) 782-0400.

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Component Maintenance Manual with Illustrated Parts List


006-05332-0003 ART 2000 Color Weather Radar Antenna/Receiver/Transmitter Part Number 071-01519-XXXX

34-40-11

T-1 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Note
IF ANY UNUSUAL OR SPECIFIC PROBLEMS ARISE, CONTACT HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC. 23500 W. 105th ST. OLATHE, KANSAS 66061. NO EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE RETURNED TO THE FACTORY FOR REPAIR UNTIL A RETURN AUTHORIZATION (RA) FORM IS REQUESTED AND RECEIVED FROM THE CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC.

PROPIETARY NOTICE
This document contains proprietary information and such information may not be disclosed to others for any purpose nor used for manufacturing purposes without written permission from Honeywell International Inc.

T-2 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 REVISION HISTORY AND INSTRUCTIONS
MANUAL: ART 2000 Rev. 3 REVISION: June 2002 PART NUMBER:006-05332-0003 Add, delete, or replace pages as indicated below and retain all tabs and dividers. Insert this page immediately behind the title page as a record of revisions. This revision level of this manual consists of the following individual publications: ____________________________________________________________________________ PAGE ACTION

____________________________________________________________________________ 9003 ADDED FIGURE 9001 HARNESS DRAWING

1086

DETECTOR CALIBRATION #7 D,E,F WAS REPLACED WITH 3-6

9001/9002

NUMBER 2,3,AND 4 CHANGED THE WORD FIGURE TO THE WORD TABLE.

34-40-11

Page R-1 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page R-2 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

SERVICE BULLETIN LIST The Service Bulletins listed below have been incorporated in this manual. Copies of these bulletins are available upon request to: Honeywell International Inc. 23500 W. 105th St. Olathe, Kansas 66061 Attn: Order Administration

ATA NO. (BENDIX NO.) ART 2000-1

MANUAL REVISION NUMBER 2

MANUAL REVISION DATE JUNE 2002

COVERAGE Improve grounding of u5 and u6 of the Power Supply/ Modulator board. Elimination of inaccurate Antenna fault messages. (As they appear on screen) Factory Mod changing Logic board.

ART 2000-2

JUNE 2002

ART 2000-3

JUNE 2002

ART 2000-4

JUNE 2002

Improves Radar Stabilization accuracy during small inputs of pitch and roll from the gyro. Incorporates new extended STC curves.

ART 2000-5

JUNE 2002

ART 2000-6

JUNE 2002

Improves the ARL circuit.

ART 2000-7

JUNE 2002

Replaces the J5001 connector with a more robust connector. Lowers voltage applied to U15 to reduce risk of blowing fuse F1.

ART 2000-8

JUNE 2002

34-40-11

Page SB-1 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

ATA NO. (BENDIX NO.) ART 2000SW2

MANUAL REVISION NUMBER 2

MANUAL REVISION DATE JUNE 2002

COVERAGE ART 2000 P/N 071-01519-0101Serial number 2020 and below.

ART 2000SW4

JUNE 2002

ART 2000 P/N 071-01519-0101 Serial number 2190 and below.

.......Complete through Revision 2.......

Page SB-2 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES SUBJECT Title Page Proprietary Notice Record of Revisions Service Bulletin List List of Effective Pages Table of Contents PAGE T-1 T-2 R-1 R-2 SB-1 SB-2 LEP-1 LEP-2 LEP-3 LEP-4 TC-1 TC-2 TC-3 TC-4 TC-5 TC-6 TC-7 TC-3 TC-4 TC-5 TC-6 TC-8 TC-9 TC-10 DATE JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 Testing and Fault Isolation SUBJECT PAGE 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 DATE JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002

Introduction Description and Operation

INTRO-1 JUNE 2002 INTRO-2 JUNE 2002 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002

F F

* INDICATES PAGES REVISED, ADDED OR DELETED IN LATEST REVISION F INDICATES FOLDOUT PAGES - PRINT ON ONE SIDE ONLY

34-40-11

Page LEP-1 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES SUBJECT PAGE 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 DATE JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 SUBJECT PAGE 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 Schematic Diagrams 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 DATE JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002

F F F F F F F

* INDICATES PAGES REVISED, ADDED OR DELETED IN LATEST REVISION F INDICATES FOLDOUT PAGES - PRINT ON ONE SIDE ONLY

Page LEP-2 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES SUBJECT F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F PAGE 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 DATE JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 SUBJECT F F F F F F F F F F Disassembly PAGE 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 3001 3002 3003 3004 4001 4002 4003 4004 5001 5002 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 9001 9002 9003 9004 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009 10010 DATE JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002

Cleaning

Check Repair

Assembly

Special F F Illustrated Parts List F F F F

* INDICATES PAGES REVISED, ADDED OR DELETED IN LATEST REVISION F INDICATES FOLDOUT PAGES - PRINT ON ONE SIDE ONLY

34-40-11

Page LEP-3 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES SUBJECT PAGE 10011 10012 10013 10014 10015 10016 10017 10018 10019 10020 10021 10022 10023 10024 10025 10026 10027 10028 10029 10030 10031 10032 10033 10034 10035 10036 10037 10038 10039 10040 10041 10042 10043 10044 10045 10046 10047 10048 10049 10050 10051 DATE JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 SUBJECT PAGE 10052 10053 10054 10055 10056 10057 10058 10059 10060 10061 10062 10063 10064 10065 10066 10067 10068 10069 10070 10071 10072 10073 10074 10075 10076 10077 10078 10079 10080 10081 10082 10083 10084 10085 10086 10087 10088 10089 10090 10091 10092 DATE JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002 JUNE 2002

F F F F F F F F

F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

F F F F F F F F

* INDICATES PAGES REVISED, ADDED OR DELETED IN LATEST REVISION F INDICATES FOLDOUT PAGES - PRINT ON ONE SIDE ONLY

Page LEP-4 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 TABLE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Paragraph/Title Page

1. ......General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 A. ....Purpose of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 B. .....Equipment Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 C. .....Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2. ......Configurations Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3. ......Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 A. .....ART 2000 Color Weather Radar Receiver/Transmitter 3 B. .....Environmental Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 4. ......Brief Description of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 A. .....Mechanical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 B. .....Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 5. ......Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 A. .....Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 B. .....Detailed Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Figure/Title Page

1. ......ART 2000 Color Weather Radar Receiver/Transmitter . . . . 1 2. ......ART 2000 Leading Particulars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3. ......DO-160C Environmental Certification Categories. . . . . . . . 5 4. ......ART 2000 PC Board and Assembly Designations . . . . . . . . 6 5. ......ART 2000 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/18

34-40-11

TC-1 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION Paragraph/Title Page

1. ......General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 2. ......Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 3. ......Functional Test Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 A. .....General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 B. .....Initial Test Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 C. .....Return To Service Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 D. .....Return To Service Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004 4. ......Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 5. ......Alignment Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087 A. .....General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087 B. .....Pre-alignment Set-up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087 C. .....Magnetron Current Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087 D. .....Video If Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 E. .....Receiver Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089 F.......AFC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090 G. .....Detector Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090 6. ......Retest Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 7. ......Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 Figure/Title Page

1001 .Typical Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 1002 .STC With 10 Inch Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006 1003 .STC With 12 Inch Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006 1004 .Normal Microprocessor and FPGA Turn-on . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012

TC-2 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION (Contd) Paragraph/Title PAGE

1005 .FPGAs Programmed Correctly but processor Inoperative 1013 1006 .Start Sync of 453 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 1007 .Stop Sync of 453 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015 1008 .Data Packet of 453 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 1009 .Received 429 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017 1010 .Discriminator Input to the Discriminator A/D . . . . . . . . . . . 1020 1011 .Discriminator Input to the Discriminator A/D . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 1012 .STC Curve and Manual Gain for Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022 1013 .STC Curve and Manual Gain for Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 1014 .STC Curve/Manual Gain for Weather (Multiple Mag Fires) 1024 1015 .Weather Compensation Bit 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 1016 .Extended STC Bit 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 1017 .Compensated Weather Data Bit 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 1018 .Weather RAM Address 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028 1019 .Radial Data Transfer from WX_RAM to 453_RAM . . . . . . 1029 1020 .Reference, Pitch, and Roll Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030 1021 .Reference, Pitch, and Roll Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031 1022 .Pitch Hall Sensor to MUX A/D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 1023 .Azimuth Hall Sensor to MUX A/D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033 1024 .Normal Operation of the +5 Vdc Pulse Width Modulator . . 1035 1025 .Normal Operation of the +9.3 Vdc Pulse Width Modulator. 1036 1026 .Normal Operation of the -15 Vdc Flyback Winding . . . . . . 1037 1027 .MAG_FIRE_OUT Pulse From Logic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041 1028 .Long Pulse Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042

34-40-11

TC-3 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION (Contd) Figure/Title Page

1029 .Mag Fire Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043 1030 .Modulator Switch Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044 1031 .Modulator Switch FET Gate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 1032 .Modulator Transformer Primary Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046 1033 .Normal Signal Junction L9-CR4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047 1034 .Normal Signal at Overvoltage Control Freq. Comp.Port . . . 1048 1035 .Normal Signal at Oscillator Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049 1036 .Normal Signal from Output of the HV P/S PWM Control. . 1050 1037 .Normal Flyback Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051 1038 .Normal Output Voltage from HVPS Transformer Secondary1054 1039 .Normal Signal Due to Flyback Primary Current . . . . . . . . . 1059 1040 .Current Loop Magnetron Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056 1041 .Magnetron Current Sense Delay Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057 1042 .Magnetron Current Sense Gate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058 1043 .Amplified Magnetron Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059 1044 .Missing Pulse Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060 1045 .Pulse Height Control Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061 1046 .Junction R14-C12/R14 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 1047 .Q4 Drain/CR4 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065 1048 .T2 Primary Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066 1049 .FPGA Done Programming Normal Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067 1050 .1.025 MHz FPGA Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070 1051 .Azimuth Current Limit Sine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071 1052 .Azimuth Current Limit Cosine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072

TC-4 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION (Contd) Figure/Title Page

1053 .Elevation Current Limit Sine (VP Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073 1054 .Elevation Current Limit Cosine (VP Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074 1055 .Azimuth Current Sense Sine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 1056 .Azimuth Current Sense Cosine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076 1057 .Elevation Current Sense Sine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077 1058 .Elevation Current Sense Cosine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078 1059 .Azimuth Current Reset (Sine). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079 1060 .Azimuth Current Reset (Cosine). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080 1061 .Elevation Current Reset (Sine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081 1062 .Elevation Current Reset (Cosine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082 DISASSEMBLY Paragraph/Title Page

1. ......General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3001 2. ......Recommended Disassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3001 A. .....Bottom Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3001 B. .....Logic Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3001 C. .....Power Supply Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3002 D. .....Receiver Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3003 E. .....Preamp Board Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3003 F.......Magnetron Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3003 G. .....Scan Motor Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3004 H. .....Tilt Motor Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3004

34-40-11

TC-5 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 CLEANING Figure/Title Page

1. ......General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4001 2. ......Recommended Cleaning Agents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4001 3. ......Recommended Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4001 A. .....Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4001 B. .....Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4002 CHECK Figure/Title Page

1. ......General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5001 2. ......Inspection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5001 A. .....Dust Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5001 B. .....Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5001 C. .....Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5001 D. .....Hardware, Covers, and Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5001 E. .....Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5001 F.......Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5001 G. .....Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5001 H. .....Terminal Connections Soldered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5002 I........Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5002 J. ......Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5002 K. .....Resistors and Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5002 L. .....Filters and Inductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5002 M. ....Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5002 N. .....Transistors and Integrated Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5002

TC-6 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 CHECK (Continued) Figure/Title Page

O. .....Rotary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5002 P.......Insulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5002

REPAIR Figure/Title Page

1. ......General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6001 2. ......Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6001 A. .....Repair Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6001 B. .....Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESDS) Protection. . . . 6002 C. .....PC Board, Two-Lead Component Removal . . . . . . . . . 6004 D. .....PC Board, Multi-Lead Component Removal (ics etc.) 6005 E. .....Replacement of Power Transistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6005 F.......Replacement of P.C. Board protective coating . . . . . . . 6005 G. .....Programmable Read Only Memory Replacement. . . . . 6006 ASSEMBLY Figure/Title Page

1. ......General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7001 2. ......Materials Required For Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7001 3. ......Recommended Reassembly Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7002 A. .....Tilt Motor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7002 B. .....Scan Motor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7002 C. .....Magnetron Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7003 D. .....Preamp Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7004

34-40-11

TC-7 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 ASSEMBLY(Contd) Figure/Title Page

E. .....Receiver Module Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7005 F.......Power Supply Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7006 G. .....Logic Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7006 H. .....Cover Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7006 Figure/Title Page

7001 .Materials Needed for Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7001 7002 .Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7002 7003 .Magnetron Cable Dressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7004 7004 .Magnetron and Preamp Cable Dressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7005 SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT Figure/Title Page

1. ......General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9001 2. ......Equipment Required for Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9001 3. ......Equipment Required for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9002 4. ......Equipment Required for Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9002

ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST Figure/Title Page

1 ......Final Assembly Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10005/10008 2 ......Power Supply/Modulator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10017/10024 3 ......Logic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10033/10040 4 ......Scan Motor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10059/10060 5 ......Gimbal Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10063/10066 6 ......Tilt Motor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10069/10070

TC-8 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST (Continued) Figure/Title Page

7 ......Magnetron Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10073/10074 8 ......Receiver Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10077/10078 9 .......Preamp Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10081/10082 10 .....Tilt Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10085/10086 11 .....Scan Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10089/10090

34-40-11

TC-9 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

TC-10 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

INTRODUCTION This manual contains information and instructions which provide the information necessary to perform maintenance functions ranging from simple checks and replacement to complete shop repair. Refer to the Table of Contents for specific sections and page locations. Technical revisions, when they occur, are indicated by a vertical bar in the left margin area on the page, beside the text or illustration that has been changed, added or deleted. When new material is added to an existing manual point pages may be inserted. When new material is added to existing point pages point-point pages may be added.

34-40-11

INTRO-1 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

INTRO-2 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 1. General This section contains information relative to maintenance or repair procedures of Honeywells BENDIX/KING ART 2000 Color Weather Radar Receiver/Transmitter, hereafter referred to as the ART 2000, the R/T, or by its full nomenclature. The ART 2000 is shown in figure 1.

ART 2000 Color Weather Radar Receiver/Transmitter Figure 1

A.

Purpose of Equipment The ART 2000 is a remote mounted weather avoidance radar receiver/transmitter. It is primarily intended for weather avoidance and ground mapping functions as an aid to navigation. Equipment Part Numbers See paragraph 2. for a listing of available part numbers.

B.

34-40-11

Page-1 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
C. Related Publications The following is a list of related publications for the ART 2000 radar receiver/transmitter.

PUBLICATION RDR 2000 Pilots Guide RDR 2000 Radar System Installation Manual

HONEYWELL IDENTIFICATION 006-08755-0000 006-00643-0000

ATA IDENTIFICATION N/A N/A

Related Publications Table 1 2. Configurations Available The ART 2000 Receiver/Transmitter is available in one configuration. The part number is 07101519-0101. Leading Particulars A. ART 2000 Color Weather Radar Receiver/Transmitter Table 2 lists of the technical characteristics pertaining to the ART 2000 receiver/transmitter.

3.

TEMPERATURE RANGE: ALTITUDE: WEIGHT: OVERALL DIMENSIONS: Base: INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS: RADAR TRANSMITTER: RF Power Output: Frequency (X-band): Pulse Repetition Freq: Pulse Width: Weather Avoidance Range Capability:

-55 C to +70C with antenna 55,000 ft. unpressurized 9.9 lbs. (4.49 kg.)

10.00 in. (25.40 cm) 2.0 amps. at 28 V dc. 2.5 amps. at 17 V dc.

4 kW magnetron peak power 3.5 kW typical 9375 MHz # 30 MHz 106.5 Hz # 5 Hz 4 sec. nominal (GMAP and WX modes) 279 NM max. with 10" antenna 305 NM max. with 12" antenna

ART 2000 Leading Particulars Table 2 (Sheet 1)

Page-2 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

RADAR RECEIVER: Sensitivity: STC: WEATHER COMPENSATION (Wx mode only): Extended STC: Variable Gain: STABILIZATION REQUIREMENTS: Reference: Inputs: 400 - 5000 Hz 26 Vrms, 400 Hz Sine Wave 115 Vrms, 400 Hz Sine Wave 20 Vp-p, 400 Hz Sine Wave 20 Vp-p, 400 Hz Square Wave 10.7 Vp-p, 400 Hz Square Wave 28 Vp-p, 5 kHz Square Wave ARINC 429 30mV to 220mV/degree, 400 Hz or 5000 Hz Pitch HI in phase with gyro exc. on .pitch up. Roll HI in phase with gyro exc. on right roll. 25/sec. (pitch and roll) 90 or 100 (configurable) 10 in. antenna (vert. polarized) - 5.31 in. 10 in. antenna (horiz. polarized) - 5.22 in. 12 in. antenna (vert. polarized) - 6.28 in. 12 in. antenna (horiz. polarized) - 6.20 in. 25/sec. 30 15 -110 dBm typical. Effective 0 to 30 NM with 10"antenna Effective 0 to 35 NM with 12" antenna 40 to 240 NM Effective 40 to 240 NM. 0 to -20 dB

Pitch and Roll Scaling:

STABILIZATION RATE: SCAN ANGLE: SCAN PHYSICAL RADIUS:

SCAN RATE: VERTICAL PROFILE: TILT ANGLE: PERFORMANCE INDEX: 10 Antenna: 12 Antenna:

209.9 dB # 2.5 dB 212.7 dB # 2.5 dB

The following are serial digital input labels to the ART 2000: LABEL 203 204 270 271 273 275 276 324 325 177 INFORMATION CONTAINED IN LABEL Altitude Baro Corrected Altitude Radar Control Word #1 Radar Control Word #2 Vertical Profile Control Word RDR Control Word #3 Radar Control Panel Control Word Pitch Angle Roll Angle Time/Temperature Recorder Data Request FORMAT BNR BNR DSC DSC DSC DSC DSC DSC BNR BNR SPEED Low Speed Low Speed Low Speed Low Speed Low Speed Low Speed Low Speed Low Speed High Speed High Speed

ART 2000 Leading Particulars Table 2 (Sheet 2) Page-3 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 The following are serial digital outputs from the ART 2000:

LABEL 177

INFORMATION CONTAINED IN LABEL Time/Temperature Recorder Data

FORMAT

SPEED

ART 2000 Serial Digital Outputs Table 3

B.Environmental Certification The ART 2000 Color Weather Radar Receiver/Transmitter meets the environmental conditions of the Radio Technical Commision for Aeronautics (RTCA) document number DO-160C, Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airline Electronic/Electrical Equipment and Instruments. Figure 2 details the environmental certification categories.

DO-160C Environmental Certification Categories Figure 2

Page-4 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 4. Brief Description of Equipment A. Mechanical Description The ART 2000 consists of a radar receiver and a radar transmitter (with applicable antenna) constructed as a single unit with a single mounting facility. A configuration module (P/N 071-00097-0000) is an integral part of the ART 2000, but is not attached to it. See the installation manual (P/N 006-00643-00XX) for more information on the Configuration Module. The RDR 2000 system provides for radar stabilization input for combined pitch, roll and tilt angles of up to #30. In the Vertical Profile mode, the antenna stabilization only responds to pitch inputs. The antenna array is attached to the microwave assembly on the ART 2000 and the two are moved together as the radar scans. The base of the ART 2000 contains the receiver and all processing and control circuits. The antenna scan angle can be configured for a 90 or a 100 scan. Upon installation, the system can be configured to include a Target Alert feature. In this configuration, if the ART detects a red intensity target with a minimum size of 2 NM in range and 2 in azimuth that is beyond 80 NM and the selected range is 80 NM or less, two red arcs separated by a black arc are displayed at the top of the display centered on the aircraft heading. Table 4 lists the assemblies found in the ART 2000 along with their respective designator number series and connector designators.

PC BOARD OR ASSEMBLY

HONEYWELL PART NUMBER

REFERENCE SERIES

CONNECTORS

Azimuth Motor Assy. Azimuth Sensor Assy. Gimbal Assy. Pitch Motor Assy. Tilt Sensor Assy. Receiver Assy. Preamp Board Magnetron Assy. Power Supply/Modulator Board Logic Board

200-05174-0000 200-05313-0000 200-05175-0000 200-05173-0000 200-05554-0000 200-05553-0000 200-08545-0000 200-05310-0000 200-08548-0000 200-08549-0000

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1000 N/A 4000 5000

P4002 P5006 N/A P4003 P5005 N/A J1002 N/A J4001, J4002, J4003 J5001, J5002, J5003, J5004, J5005, J5006, J5502

ART 2000 PC Board and Assembly Designations Table 4

34-40-11

Page-5 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 B. Electrical Description The ART 2000 can accommodate up to three ARINC 429 control inputs, however, only two can be actively controlling the system at one time and display #3 must be EFIS 40/50 software level 9 or higher. It can also output information to a maximum of three displays by using SDI bits on the ARINC 453 bus. The control/display unit used enables selection of basic weather, ground mapping and self-test functions. Also, image display optimization is made possible by the use of controls for range selection, display intensity and antenna tilt angle. All these functions are multiplexed on the ARINC 429 control bus. Alphanumerics are displayed on-screen for selected mode of operation and the selected range along with the interval (nautical miles) between the displayed range rings. All controls for the system are mounted on the perimeter of the IN 182A screen. In EFIS installations, the radar is controlled through the Radar Control Panel. 5. Theory of Operation A. Block Diagram Theory The following is a list of abbreviations and what they mean. These abbreviations will be used throughout the theory of operation discussion. Refer to figure 2 for the following discussion.

TERM agc afc dac a/d eprom FPGA if HDC lsb msb MMIC pwm stc estc

DEFINITION Automatic Gain Control Automatic Frequency Control Digital to Analog Converter Analog to Digital Converter Electrically Programmable Read Only Memory Field Programmable Gate Array Intermediate Frequency (59 MHz) High During Configuration Least Significant Bit Most Significant Bit Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit Pulse Width Modulation Sensitivity Time Control Extended Sensitivity Time Control
Abbreviations Table 5

Page-6 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 (1) Low Voltage Power Supply The low voltage power supply receives unfiltered 27.5 V dc from the aircraft bus and provide several voltages necessary to operate the unit. The low voltage power supply consists of the following parts - a hash filter to remove unwanted noise and spikes from the air craft power bus, a low voltage power supply, and a timer circuit to hold the power supply on for a fixed amount of time after the unit is turn off. This time out is necessary so that the antenna is parked in the down position when the unit is turned off. The low voltage outputs from the power supply consists of filtered 27.5 V, +5 V, +15 V, -15 V, +24 V, and +9.3 V. (2) Transmitter The transmitter portion of the radar consists of a high voltage power supply, pulse transformer, magnetron, magnetron isolator, circulator, harmonic filter and the antenna. The high voltage power supply and the pulse transformer provide the magnetron with a pulse of 3600 volts at 3 amps for 4 sec. The timing of the 4 sec pulse is generated by the pulse timing circuit on the logic board. Once the 4000 Watt magnetron fires, the rf pulse passes through a magnetron isolator of 20 dB. This isolator is necessary to protect the magnetron from being pulled in the case of a bad VSWR from either the antenna or radome. From the magnetron isolator the rf pulse then passes through the three port circulator. This circulator allows the magnetron energy to pass through to the antenna and not on to the receiver. This circulator has a 20 dB reverse isolation. From the three port circulator, the rf pulse then passes through the harmonic filter. This filter is a low pass filter with a break point of approximately 12 GHz. This filter is necessary to reduce the power in the second harmonic of the magnetron in order to pass radiated harmonic specifications. The rf pulse is then radiated by the antenna into the atmosphere with a gain of either 26.0 dBi (10 inch) or 27.8 dBi (12 inch). (3) Receiver The rf pulse travels from the antenna at a rate approximately equal to the speed of light to a weather target and then is reflected back to the antenna. The antenna provides a gain to the received energy of either 26.0 dBi (10 inch) or 27.8 dBi (12 inch). The received energy from the antenna is then passed through the harmonic filter into the three port circulator. The three port circulator prevents the received energy from passing towards the magnetron and allow the energy to pass to the receiver. From the three port circulator, the received energy passes through the diode limiter. The diode limiter is used to protect the receiver from the high amount of energy produced by the magnetron. Although the three port circulator provides 20 dB of isolation to the receiver from the magnetron, there is still a very large amount of energy which is allowed to pass. The diode limiter is self biasing when a large amount of energy enters the input port. The limiter is then biased on and allows only 600 mW of power out the output port. The received signal is of low enough energy level to prevent self biasing of the limiter.

34-40-11

Page-7 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 Once the received signal passes through the limiter, it is then passed on to the receiver module. The receiver module consists of a low noise amplifier, mixer, local oscillator and a unity gain buffer. The total gain of the receiver module is 5 dB with a noise figure of 4.5 dB. The received signal is amplified, mixed, and the buffered 59 MHz if is then sent onto the preamp. The control of the local oscillator will be further discussed in the Automatic Frequency Control section, paragraph 5.B.(3)(f) of the detailed theory of operation. The pre-amplifier consists of a one stage amplifier with a gain of 30 dB with a noise figure of 3 dB and a temperature sensor (temp sensor 2). This temperature sensor is used for all receiver calibration operations. From the pre-amplifier the received signal is then passed to the if section of the logic board. The if consists of a 800 kHz band pass filter, two stage of gain, an active detector, a selectable low pass filter of either 125 kHz or 250 kHz, and a video amplifier. Also in the if section of the logic board is the afc sample amplifier which is used to supply a strong signal to the afc circuit during the time the magnetron is firing. The two stages of gain in the if section is used to control the calibration and noise level of the receiver. The first stage of amplification is the Sensitivity Timing Control (stc) and the Automatic Gain Control (agc) will vary from 35 dB of gain to -5 dB of gain. The stc is used to calibrate the receiver to account for the two way loss of energy through the atmosphere. This gain level will vary with time starting with the magnetron fire and ending at either 30 NM (10" antenna) or 35 NM (12" antenna). Once the stc time is complete, the final gain level will be the agc gain. The second amplifier is the Manual Gain control. The gain of this amplifier will vary from approximately 30 dB to 10 dB depending upon the gain setting selected by the pilot. After the received signal is amplified to a calibrated level, it is then detected by an active detector with a gain of 20 dB. From the detector, the signal is once again filtered by an selectable low pass filter. This filter is normally 250 kHz at the 3 dB break point, but on the 320 NM range (ART 2100 only), the filter is switched to the 125 kHz low pass filter. This switching of filters increases the receivers performance by reducing the noise of the signal by 3 dB. From the low pass filter, the signal is buffered through a unity gain amplifier and passed on to the 8 bit video a/d. (4) Automatic Frequency Control The Automatic Frequency Control (afc) is used to control the frequency of the local oscillator in the receiver module. The local oscillator is mixed with the received signal and a 59 MHz if frequency is produced. In order for the 59 MHz if frequency to remain at 59 MHz, the afc circuit must adjust the local oscillator periodically to correct for magnetron frequency drift. The afc circuitry consists of three basic parts - the frequency sample circuit, the microprocessor, and the local oscillator voltage drive circuit.

Page-8 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 During the magnetron fire, a small amount of energy is allowed to pass into the receiver and is mixed with the local oscillator. The if signal is then amplified by the preamp and sent on to the if section of the logic board. In the Intermediate Frequency (if), the afc amplifier increases the magnetron frequency sample to a level which activates the discriminator circuit. The output from the discriminator circuit is then passed on to a unity gain amplifier to the discriminator a/d. Eight samples from the discriminator a/d are saved in the stc ram and recalled by the microprocessor for afc control. The microprocessor reads the eight samples from the stc ram and determines if the if frequency is either too high, too low or on frequency. If the local oscillator is off by a large amount either high or low, then the microprocessor drives the local oscillator at large frequency steps. Once the if is within a predetermined range from desired, then the microprocessor drives the local oscillator by smaller frequency steps. The local oscillator drive circuitry consists of three 8 bit d/a converters. The output from these three d/a converters is summed together and sent to the receiver as the LO drive. The three d/a converters consist of the course, fine and offset. The course sets up the nominal bias for the fine and offset and have a range of approximately 24 volts. The offset is adjusted by the microprocessor in the afc software procedure. The offset is also controlled by the microprocessor and accounts for the frequency pulling of the local oscillator by the magnetron.

(5)

Weather Data Accumulator and 453 Transmitter The weather data accumulator circuit consists of the following - video a/d, WX rom, weather compensation and extended stc control circuit, WX ram, radial sum circuit, 453 ram, and the 453 serial data transmitter. The digitized video from the 8 bit video a/d is passed onto the lower 8 address bits of the WX rom. The next 6 address bits of the WX rom are used for weather compensation control. The final 4 address bits of the WX rom are used for extended stc. The output from the WX rom is an 8 bit video value adjusted for weather compensation and extended stc. The weather compensation LSB is equivalent to 1 dB of signal attenuation due to intervening weather. The maximum amount of weather compensation is 32 dB of compensation. The extended stc increases the level of the returned signal by 10 dB at a linear rate from 40 NM to 240 NM. The extended stc provides additional stc range, but not at a true calibration rate. The compensated video from the WX rom is then clocked into the WX ram at the range clock rate. The WX ram consists of 32 pages. Each page holds 256 bytes of compensated video from one radial for a total of 32 radials. At approximately 4 msec. after the magnetron fire, the radial summation starts. The radial summation sums all 32 radials and then divide the sum by 32 to obtain an average compensated video.

34-40-11

Page-9 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 The 453 data format consists of 1600 bits of data. Bits 0 to 63 consist of control data and bits 64 through 1600 consists of radial information. At the appropriate time, the microprocessor sends the first 64 bits of control data to the 453 ram. The average compensated video is transferred to the 453 ram at approximately 5 msec. after the magnetron fire. During the transfer, the 8 bit average compensated video is converted to a 3 bit color level. Due to the nature of the 453 data format, 512 bins (3 bit color value) of radial information is sent during one transmission. Since only 256 bins of radial information have been collected, the 3 bit color value is repeated to give a total of 512 bins of information. Once the data has been sent to the 453 ram, the microprocessor then sends a request to the 453 transmitter to start transmitting data to the indicator. The data format of the 453 data transmission follows the modified ARINC 708 data spec with compatibility to the RDS series radars. See paragraph 5.B.(4) for more information on the 453 word. (6) Logic and Control The logic and control section consists of the microprocessor and its support circuits and the 429 data receivers. The microprocessor is a Zilog Z8400 and is configured in an memory mapped I/O configuration.

The microprocessor and its support circuits consist of the microprocessor, 2 Meg of rom, 12K of ram, 2K of eeprom, a reset and watchdog chip, a crystal oscillator, four discrete 8-bit output ports, five discrete 8-bit input ports and a 16 input a/d port. The eeprom stores data such as elapsed time of unit operation, faults, temperature of the unit when the fault occurred, time when the unit failed, history of unit failure and temperature calibration data. The four discrete 8-bit outputs are divided into the mode control port, the machine cycle port, the configuration module port, and a general purpose port. The first 8 bit input ports read unit input discretes, such as R/T on/off from indicators. The second 8 bit input port is used as an R/T configuration port. This port provides inputs for configuration such as 10" or 12" antennas, transmit disable, scan disable, and several factory calibration switches. The third 8 bit input port is used for factory calibration and gyro sign bits. The forth 8 bit input port is used for the configuration module. The fifth 8 bit input port is used for altitude input (ART 2100 only). Three of the five 429 receivers provide the microprocessor with control data from each controller/indicator. The fourth 429 receiver receives data from the pitch and roll gyro if the unit is configured to receive gyro data from the 429 receiver and not the analog ports. The fifth 429 receiver receives altitude data (ART 2100 only). There is one 429 transmitter, but it is used for test purposes only.

Page-10 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 The configuration module is mounted external to the ART unit and remains with the aircraft when an ART is replaced on the aircraft. This configuration module stores the gain settings for the analog gyro, ART configuration and the type of indicator/controller for that particular aircraft. This is saved so that when an ART is replaced on an aircraft, the need to re-align the gyro and re-configure the ART is eliminated. If the ART system is being installed for the first time, then a gyro alignment and equipment configuration is necessary. (7) Gyro and Antenna Stabilization The gyro and antenna stabilization circuit consists of three parts - the analog gyro inputs, the azimuth and tilt motor drive circuits, and the Hall effect sensors. The analog gyro inputs consist of the 400 Hz reference, pitch, and roll. There are numerous gyro systems which the ART must interface to. Each of these systems have varying parameters from aircraft to aircraft. The gyro reference input can vary from 10 Vrms to 115 Vrms. The gyro reference input therefore has a switchable gain amplifier so that the same level of reference voltage may be applied to the detector circuit. The pitch and roll inputs are applied to fixed gain amplifiers and then detected. The detected outputs from the three signals are then integrated and multiplexed to a programmable amplifier. The gain values for the programmable amplifier are stored in the configuration module and applied to the amplifier when the appropriate input is selected.

The pitch and roll data is multiplexed by the microprocessor to the a/d converter and then read by the microprocessor. The pitch and roll data is then used to calculate the appropriate tilt of the antenna in accordance with the current azimuth setting. Once the tilt angle has been calculated, then the microprocessor determines if the tilt of the antenna should be increased or decreased from its current setting. The microprocessor, in a fixed interrupt time, instructs the azimuth drive circuit and the pitch drive circuit to step their motors. The azimuth motor drive circuit and the tilt motor drive circuit are located on the power supply/modulator/motor drive board due to the heat generated by the driver circuit. These drivers receive commands from the microprocessor to either step the motors up or down or not to step the motor at all. The azimuth and pitch motors are stepper motors and step the antenna in 0.05 degree steps. The two Hall effect sensor are used to determine the position of the antenna in both the tilt and azimuth axis. The input voltage from the Hall effect devices is then multiplexed to the 16 input a/d.

34-40-11

Page-11 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page-12 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 2 ART 2000 Block Diagram

34-40-11

Page 13 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 B. Detailed Theory Refer to the appropriate schematics in the testing section beginning on page 101 of this manual. (1) Low-Voltage Power Supply The Low-Voltage Power Supply provides the following voltages and approximate currents: Voltage +5 Vdc +15 Vdc -15 Vdc +24 Vdc +9.3 Vdc +28 Vdc Filtered Table 6 Low Voltage Power Supply Outputs (a) ON_OFF and Antenna Stow Timer To apply power to the ART 2000, the ON/OFF line P4001-14 is grounded, which causes Q4021 and Q4023 to conduct. When Q4021 pulls the gate of Q4018 low, aircraft power is applied to the power supply. As +5 V dc is applied to the Power OFF Antenna Stow Timer, Q4023 is now on which turns Q4015 and Q4022 on. Q4015 lowers the voltage at the not_clear input putting U4020 in the clear state and inhibits operation of the 15 sec. timer. The collector of Q4022 is low placing U4008 in preset. When the Q output of flip-flop U4008 is high, Q4019 is turned on in parallel with Q4021. The power supply is now in the ON state and remains unchanged during normal operation. When P4001-14, the ON/OFF line, is ungrounded and allowed to go high (turned OFF) the emitter of Q4021 goes high and the collector of Q4023 goes low. Q4018 remains on because Q4019 remains on for 15 sec. as long as the Q output of U4008 is high. Current .75 amps .18 amps .08 amps .01 amps .55 amps Wattage 3.7 watts 2.7 watts 1.3 watts 0.2 watts 5.2 watts

34-40-11

Page 15 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 Q4015 is off which removes the clear input and the 15 sec. antenna stow timer begins to charge C4054 toward the trip point of the monostable U4020. Q4022 is now off allowing the monostable circuit of U4020 to time out and trigger U4008, which is no longer held in preset. When the 15 seconds times out, the Q output of U4008 goes low turning off Q4019, which turns off Q4018 removing Aircraft power from the power supply. C4053, C4056, C4057 and CR4021 are used for the correct timing to assure proper turn on and off sequence. (b) Input Overvoltage The overvoltage sensor, CR4022 doesnt conduct unless the aircraft power buss exceeds +36 V. When CR4022 conducts, Q4017 conducts causing Q4018 to turn off and remain off for the duration of the transient. When the transient is removed, CR4022 no longer conducts and Q4018 is restored to normal operation. CR4039 is a polarity diode for protection from negative transients as well as accidental reversing of input power polarity. Incorrect power supply polarity will blow fuse F4001. (c) Switching Regulators Switching Regulators U4005 and U4006 are used for +15V, -15V, +5V, +24V and +9.3V. These ics are capable of switching 3 amps each. Both are configured as Buck Regulators operating at 72 kHz. Each ic has an internal reference voltage of 5.05 V dc and an undervoltage lockout. There is thermal shutdown and 3 amp overcurrent shutdown built in. A frequency compensating resistor and capacitor are required at pin 5 of each regulator ic. Several voltages are supplied by one regulator by using transformer T4005. Only the 5 Volt output is compared by the feedback loop and compared with the reference voltage and is better regulated than the other voltages. The regulators provide 72 kHz pulses to the transformer or inductor which is used to store the energy temporarily. Page 16 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 When the charging pulse turns off, the current in the primary of the transformer T4005 changes direction and the circuit is completed by diode CR4015. The energy stored as flux in the transformer is transferred to the secondary and rectified by the diodes for each supply voltage. The +24 Volt supply is derived from the 15 Volt transformer winding by a voltage doubling rectifier CR4025 and CR4026 with C4063 and C40064. At each cycle, the 5 Volt supply is sampled and compared to the reference in U4005 and the pulse width is changed to correct the output voltage. The 9.3 Volt supply using U4006 is similar but has only one output voltage and an inductor L4001 is used for energy storage. C4030, C4042, C4073 and C4074 store energy for the switching regulators and, with L4004, decouple the switching spikes from the aircraft bus and reduce RFI emissions. The worst case failure mode for Buck regulators is a dead short which allows the aircraft power to pass through unimpeded. An overvoltage protection circuit prevents damage should regulator failure occur. U4014 monitors the +5 V dc and U4015 the +9.3 V dc. If either of these overvoltage monitors senses a high voltage condition, SCR Q4020 is turned on which crowbars the input and blows the fuse. (d) Temperature Sensor A temperature sensor is included to measure the internal temperature of the unit. The sensor (U4017) is an LM335 ic that behaves like a zener diode with output voltage that is linearly proportional to absolute temperature. The output is summed with a temperature stable offset voltage from reference U4019. Amplifier U4018A is a high impedance differential amplifier that buffers and provides dc offset for the sensor signal. U4018B is the scaling amplifier that provides a linear .5 to 5 Volt signal for TEMP_SENSOR_1 (J4001-28)and TP4009 corresponding to -550 to +1250 C. This dc signal is sent to the logic board (J4001-28) where it is converted to digital form for use by the microprocessor for adjusting gains.

34-40-11

Page 17 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 (2) Transmitter (a) High-Voltage Power Supply A flyback power supply provides the 250 to 350 V dc for the magnetron pulse modulator. U4001 is a pulse width controller ic that determines the oscillating frequency and pulse duration of the flyback power supply circuit. The operating frequency is approximately 25 kHz and the pulse width is controlled to provide the required high voltage. Power MOSFET Q4001 is switched by U4001 and provides a pulse of correct width to the flyback transformer T4001. Diode CR4001 rectifies the high voltage which is stored by low loss film capacitors C4011 and C4013. This high-voltage may be read at TP4003 with caution. The multi-purpose resistive divider string of R4021, R4028, R4029, R4020, R4015 provides: High-voltage bleeder resistor for C4011 and C4013. Under-voltage sense to comparator U4002C for fault monitoring. Over-voltage sense to comparator U4002D for fault monitoring. Over-voltage sense to U4018/Q4028 for limiting. The flyback operation is inhibited (pin 1 of U4001 low): During the one minute start-up period. When HV_ENABLE is at logic 1 by microprocessor control. On over-voltage condition sensed at R4021. When MOSFET Q4004 turns on for 4 sec. to create the magnetron pulse, the current demand at C4011 and C4013 is so high that the controller senses a momentary short circuit and the flyback controller restarts. R4008 and C4004 cause the power supply to slow-start after each modulator pulse and provide about 2 msec. of idle time.

Page 18 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 This time is the receiver "quiet-time" when it is desirable to have this circuit turned off to reduce switching noise. C4007 filters the internal reference voltage while R4009 and C4008 are the flyback oscillator timing elements for 25 kHz operation. The waveform at TP4002 is a damped 25 kHz oscillation peculiar to flyback power supplies which is interrupted at 10 msec. intervals by the magnetron pulse. It is difficult to view because of variation in each cycle. CR4009 clamps any negative transients that may occur. The output from the controller drives a MOSFET Q4001 which switches the primary of T4001 to ground. The transformer ratio is only 1:2.5 but flyback action provides much higher output voltage. Current is sensed across R4013 in the source path of Q4001 and supplies information to the flyback controller, U4001. Both the flyback switching rate of 25 kHz and the magnetron pulse repetition rate of 106 per second place heavy demands on the energy supply capacitors C4009 and C4134. C4010 helps keep high frequency switching noise from the input power leads. There are effectively two pisection filters using both inductors L4004 and L4003 to prevent radiation from the high-voltage power supply via the power leads. An over-voltage condition is sensed by the resistive divider R4021, R4028, R4029, R4020, R4015. The voltage sensed at R4021 is compared by U4018 to a reference voltage of 2.5 Volts divided from 5.0 Volts by R4026 and R4027. The output of the comparator U4018 controls transistor switch Q4029 to inhibit the flyback controller by pulling pin 1 of U4001 low. This happens very briefly and the power supply maintains the upper voltage limit of 350 Vdc if the current control loop should malfunction. Fault sensing information is provided by the over_under_voltage sensors. Over-voltage is sensed across R4021 and R4028 from ground and is compared to 5 Vdc in U4002D and Under-voltage is sensed across R4021, R4028, and R4029 to ground and compared in U4002C to 5 Vdc. Page 19 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 If either fault conditions exists, the OVER_UNDER_VOLTAGE output to the FPGA (U4011 pin 39) goes to logic 0. The one minute turn-on timer for the magnetron warm-up is initiated when the unit is turned on and is timed by R4022 and C4019. This time is normally about one minute but for short interruptions, requires about the same reset time as the duration of the interruption. The magnetron filament requires a minute to warmup when cold but can recover faster from short interruptions. The comparator U4002A holds pin 1 of U4001 (TP4001) low until the time out period expires. When the radar is turned on but in a non-transmitting mode, the HV_ENABLE input (J4001-13) is high and the high-voltage power supply will not operate. For brief power interruptions, it may require longer for the microprocessor to reset than for the highvoltage power supply to be operational again. Under these circumstances, the HV_ENABLE is high to inhibit the high-voltage. (b) Pulse Forming Network A .15 Ohm sense resistor (R4195) is in the ground return of the secondary of the pulse transformer T4002. The pulse current for the magnetron is sampled across R4195 and the resulting voltage is differentially amplified to minimize noise by U4059. The pulse may be observed at TP4020 but will be distorted. Viewing the current pulse with a current probe is more reliable. U4058 is a dual multi-vibrator ic which provides the proper delay and width for a sample-hold window. Timing elements R4208 and C4146 set the delay time for the first one-shot at 2 sec. and a 1 sec. pulse width for the sample window is determined by R4206 and C4145 of the second one-shot. This gate signal, which can be viewed at TP4015 as a positive going logic pulse, is used to open the sample gate (U4060) for 1 sec. and charge capacitor C4144. R4221 and C4144 integrate the error signals from several cycles. Op amp U4061A buffers the output and maintains a very high impedance so the sample capacitor C4144 is not loaded. Page 20 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 U4061B amplifier supplies the error voltage for the pulse width flyback controller U4001. The error signal which can be measured at TP4014 is compared to the internal reference of U4001 and the flyback pulse width is adjusted so this voltage will be forced to 2.5 Volts. The gain of U4061B is adjusted by R4200 for the correct high voltage at the primary of the pulse transformer T4002 to provide a 3 amp magnetron pulse. U4061C and U4061D are used as comparators to establish a window to sense abnormally high or low pulse current. If current is high (shorted magnetron) or low (open magnetron) a missing pulse indication is present at TP4015 as a 4 sec., 5 Volt positive pulse. The MISSING_PULSE signal is sent to the FPGA (U4011) pin 40 for processing. A missing pulse indication may also be caused by loss of filament voltage, shorted or open wires, arcing or other problems. The pulse width and repetition rate is determined on the logic board and applied to the modulator as MAG_FIRE_OUT (J4001-12). Diode CR4008 holds the one-shot U4020 in clear so no pulses pass unless the HV_ENABLE and 1 minute start-up timer are satisfied. A oneshot (U4020) is started by the MAG_FIRE_OUT pulse and limits the pulse width to less than 6 sec. An accidental pulse of longer duration would damage the receiver/limiter and possibly the magnetron. The MAG_FIRE_OUT pulse shape is kept square by the comparator U4002B. The emitter follower pair Q4002 and Q4003 provide sufficient current to drive the power MOSFET Q4004. This rectangular pulse may be observed as a 15 Volt rectangular pulse at TP4004 and TP4005 with a turn-on distortion caused by driving the MOSFET switch. The modulating pulse may be seen at TP4008 as an undistorted 5 V logic pulse. The power MOSFET switches the primary of the Pulse Modulation Transformer T4002 to ground. The SCR circuit Q4007 is a tail-chopper to speed the fall time of the pulse and help reset the pulse transformer core for the next pulse. When the pulse voltage across the transformer begins to fall, the

34-40-11

Page 21 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 gate turns on and fires the SCR dumping any remaining charge rapidly into R4014. Diodes CR4009 and CR4010 are reverse spike clamp diodes to prevent damage to the MOSFET from negative transients. Pulse transformer T4002 with a turns ratio of about 1:11, steps the pulse voltage up to 3700 volts nominal. All connections are insulated so there is no point to measure the pulse voltage out of the transformer. The secondary of the pulse modulation transformer carries the filament voltage for the magnetron and the high-voltage negative pulse. Approximately 3.0 volts of the filament voltage are lost in the transformer resistance and diode CR4040 which leaves 6.3 V dc at the filaments. Its not practical to measure the filament voltage at the magnetron because of the high pulse voltage. Diode CR4040 helps isolate the secondary so all the current passes through the sense resistor R4195. Since it is impossible to measure the magnetron current by placing a current probe over the shielded leads, a port has been cut in the power supply board to accommodate a Tektronix current probe. The probe can be used from either side of the board but polarity will be reversed from the component side. Filament current for the magnetron flows both directions in these paths and will NOT be added to the pulse current measurement. The current probe should be used when adjusting R4200 for the correct high voltage required for 3 amps of magnetron current and to select the best inductance value for L4009 to minimize the slope of the pulse. NOTE: Pulse modulation causes extremely high currents to circulate in ground paths. Nominal currents of 30 amps are present in the pulse transformer primary. Trouble shooting with scope or voltmeter is difficult.

Page 22 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 (c) Magnetron The negative pulses are applied to the cathode of a grounded anode, fixed frequency, X Band, pulse magnetron. The output of the magnetron is nominally 4 kW at 9375 MHz for 4 sec. The filaments require 6.3 V dc at 550 mA. There are no adjustments to the magnetron. (d) RF Network An E plane isolator, an E plane three port circulator, and a harmonic filter are combined in an integral unit. The diode limiter, magnetron and antenna are mounted to the rf network with waveguide connections. The isolator sections provides 20 dB of magnetron isolation to reduce the pulling effects of bad load caused by radome or antenna problems. The circulator passes the transmitted pulse to the antenna and block the path to the receiver. The circulator has 20 dB of isolation between the two parts. Filter sections are located between the circulator and the antenna to prevent radiation of harmonics. Signals that return from a target are passed by the circulator to the receiver and blocked from the magnetron. (e) Diode Limiter The circulator provides 20 dB of isolation between the magnetron and the receiver but this would be enough rf to damage the receiver. A diode limiter is inserted at this point to limit the rf entering the receiver to 600 mW maximum. The diodes are self-biasing from the rf and require no connections other that the waveguide. There are no adjustments and the diodes are not replaceable. A filter is included in the diode-limiter to prevent any off frequency rf caused by a magnetron mis-fire from destroying the receiver.

34-40-11

Page 23 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 (3) Receiver (a) Low Noise Front End The X Band receiver module is not repairable and has no adjustments. It consists of a low noise preamplifier, an image canceling mixer, a local oscillator and buffer amplifier. The local oscillator frequency is 59 MHz above the received frequency and is tuned with a voltage derived from the afc circuit. The noise figure is 4.5 dB a 9375 MHz and the 59 MHz output has an overall gain of about 5 dB. (b) 59 MHz Low Noise Preamplifier A low noise MMIC (monolithic microwave integrated circuit), I1001, provides a noise figure of less than 3 dB and gain of 31 dB. Power is supplied from the logic board via the coaxial cable center conductor. This coax also takes the output signal from the preamp to the if section on the logic board. The input is isolated by capacitor C1002. The ic amplifier is designed for 50 Ohm terminations and grounding is extremely important. (c) Temperature Sensor The casting temperature is sampled by a sensor to supply data enabling the software to make gain corrections. The sensor, U1002, is an LM35 which is similar to a zener diode with a voltage output that increases linearly 10 mV/ Centigrade. The voltage from a temperature compensated reference, U1004, is divided by R1002 and R1003 then buffered by amplifier U1003A to provide a reference voltage of .5 Volts. Amplifier U1003B has unity gain provides a high input impedance and signal inversion for the temperature sensor. Output at J1002-2 is 1.85 Volts to .6 Volts changing linearly with temperature from -550 to +700 C.

Page 24 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 (d) 59 MHz If Strip The 59 MHz if section receives downconverted signals from the receiver module via the preamplifier and the coax cable to jack J5502. There is approximately 48 dB of gain in the receiver/preamp assembly. The actual amplitude of these signals depends upon the amount of moisture in clouds, or the reflective surface in map mode, and the distance to the target. The video IF section performs: 1 IF passband filtering Main IF amplification and detection Manual Gain, Automatic Gain and stc control Video buffering and limiting Video bandwidth filter switching A resistive divider (R5551, R5552, R5555) splits the input signal from J5502 for the main video if and the afc limiting if amplifier that drives the discriminator. Resistors R5511 and R5512 are used to supply operating current to the Pre-amp board through the signal coax cable. Two capacitively matched and coupled LC pairs, L5501/C5527, C5501, C5528 and L5502/C5543, C5504, C5503, C5529, with coupling capacitor C5502, provide most of the filtering for the main if. C5528, C5529, and C5543 are temperature compensating capacitors to minimize changes at temperature extremes. Amplifier U5501 provides up to 45 dB of gain and is gain controlled by the stc/ agc control voltage received from amplifier U5122A. Input to this amplifier is high-impedance and single-ended from the bandpass filter. Differential output through T5501 provides a match to I5502 and helps shape the IF passband. STC gain control is applied to pin 5 of this amplifier.

34-40-11

Page 25 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 4 IC U5502 provides up to 45 dB of gain and is gain controlled by the MAN_GAIN_DRIVE voltage received from amplifier U5028C. Both input and output are differential with T5502 providing additional passband shaping and impedance matching into the detector, Q5501. Q5502 is connected as a bias diode for the detector, Q5501. L5506 and C5517 trap the 59 MHz if signal and pass the video. The detected output pulse from Q5501 may be as high as 12 volts at the detector so it is voltage divided by R5510 and R5509 to a level below 5 volts. Detector video output is filtered above 125 kHz by C5520 when transistor Q5503 is turned on. This integrates the return signal and the pulse viewed at TP5023 is rounded. Normal operation with Q5503 turned off will have at least 250 kHz bandwidth. Video buffer amplifier U5503 has unity gain and the output a signal of less than 5 Volts for the a/d converter U5036. R5550 helps isolate the amplifier from spikes generated in the a/d converter.

(e)

Receiver Gain Control The receiver gain control consists of two major functions, the Manual Gain (Man Gain), and the Sensitivity Timing Control/Automatic Gain Control (stc/agc). Man Gain is used by the pilot to decrease the gain of the receiver to reduce target saturation. The Man Gain is to be decremented the gain of the receiver 20 dB in 1 dB steps. The stc/agc is used to account for the attenuation of the rf energy through the atmosphere and then to control the final gain of the receiver. The Man Gain circuit consists of three major sections. The first section is the Man Gain drive circuit consisting of the following components: Quad d/a, U5027, and an op amp, U5028.

Page 26 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 Section two consists of the if amplifier, U5502. The third section is the microprocessor and the 429 control word form the indicator/controller. When the pilot varies the manual gain at the controller, the gain value which is sent by 429 digital data buss will vary from 0 dB of attenuation to a max of 20 dB of attenuation. The microprocessor reads the man gain value from the 429 receiver and then send a digital value to the manual gain d/a. This 8 bit value varies the voltage out of U5027 - pin 19 from 0 V to 5 V. This voltage is then amplified by U5028 to a voltage range from 0 V to 12 V as measured at test point TP5007. The manual gain voltage is then applied to R5505 which converts the voltage to a current and then onto U5502, Man Gain Amp. U5502 is an if amplifier with controllable gain. The gain of U5502 will vary from approximately 30 dB to 10 dB in 1 dB steps. The stc/agc circuit consists of four major sections. The first section is the stc/agc drive circuit which consists of the following components: stc ram, U5118, stc d/a, U5119, stc op amp, U5122, and the stc output controller, U5037. Section two consists of the gain controlled if amplifier, U5501. The third section is the video a/d, U5036, which is used to sample the video noise level. The last section is the microprocessor which reads the video level and then sends a new control voltage to the if amp via the stc/agc drive circuit. The stc ram, U5118, is used for three functions. The first 8 memory locations hold the discriminator a/d samples during magnetron fire. This is further discussed in the Automatic Frequency Control section, paragraph 5.B.(3)(f). The second function is to hold the stc curves for both weather and map. The third function is to hold the current agc value in the last stc location.

34-40-11

Page 27 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 Memory locations 8 through 224, 10" antenna, or 255, 12" antenna, holds the stc curves. The stc ram, U5118, is further divided into two pages. Page 1 is for weather stc curves and page 2 is for map curves. When the mode is changed from weather to map or map to weather, the most significant bit of the stc ram is toggled to change the current page. Once the magnetron has fired, the stc curves are clocked out of the stc ram by the stc control circuit, U5037. This circuit controls the output so that each memory location is approximately equal to one third of a NM. Due to the dynamic range of the receiver being approximately 38 dB, the stc can only control the receivers gain for the first 30 NM, 10" antenna, or 35 NM, 12" antenna. Beyond the this range, a second receiver calibration method is used. This second calibration method is called the Extended stc, estc. The estc will be discussed in the Weather Accumulator and 453 Transmitter section, paragraph 5.B.(4). Once the stc curve reaches the maximum limit, the last value to be output is the agc setting. This level is set so that the receiver is at maximum gain. When the receiver is at maximum gain, the noise at the front end of the receiver is amplified to a level that should not cross the green threshold. If the green threshold is exceeded by the noise, then the radar screen will show false targets. In order to reduce false targets, the agc alters the gain of the receiver so that the noise floor is just at the threshold of green, but not exceeding it. During the radar quiet time, approximately 7 msec. after the magnetron fired, the microprocessor reads the video voltage from the video a/d, U5036. This video value is filtered by the microprocessor and then compared to a noise threshold value. If the filtered value is not equal to the noise threshold value, then the microprocessor will then either increase or decrease the value written to the agc memory location, last stc value. Page 28 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 (f) Automatic Frequency Control (afc) The Automatic Frequency Control, afc, function consists of five major sections. The first section is the Local Oscillator, LO, drive circuit which consists of the following components: the LO d/a, U5027, the gain adjust op amps, U5028, and the summing op amp, U5144. The second section is the frequency discriminator circuit which consists of the following components: the limiting amplifiers, U5504 and U5505, the discriminator, U5506, and the discriminator adjust coil, L5524, and the discriminator buffer, U5507. The third section is the discriminator a/d, U5030, and SRC ram, U5118. The fourth section is the local oscillator within the receiver module. The fifth section is the transmitter fault section which consists of the missing pulse detection circuit and the high/low voltage fault. The fault detection circuits are discussed in the Power Supply section, paragraph 5.B.(2)(a). The Automatic Frequency Control, afc, circuit is used to maintain a 59 MHz separation between the magnetron and the local oscillator. When the magnetron frequency is mixed with the local oscillator frequency the 59 MHz if is produced. This 59 MHz is amplified and sent on to the discriminator circuit in the if section of the logic board. The first afc if amplifier, U5504, has single ended coupling both in and out and provides about 40 dB of fixed gain with the gain control connected to ground through R5525. The second amplifier, U5505, is also single ended both in and out with gain fixed at maximum by R5527. These stages do not have tunable matching elements and therefore have less gain than the video if section. A network of L5539 and C5568 match the if amplifier to the Discriminator. U5506 is a four-quadrant multiplier connected as a quadrature detector with amplitude limited if signals applied to both ports of a balanced mixer with one port shifted in phase by L5524/C5542/C5576, a temperature compensated L/C phase shift network.

34-40-11

Page 29 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 C5576 is a temperature compensating capacitor that minimizes the changes at temperature extremes and assure that the discriminator tracks the if filter. The output as seen at TP503 and TP504 is a differential voltage. U5507A amplifier has a differential input. The output signal is buffered and referenced to the 2.5V reference level in U5507B then sent to the a/d converter U5030. The frequency error pulse can be viewed at TP5018 which is the signal read by the a/d converter but it may contain noise spikes from the a/d conversion process. The output from the discriminator buffer, U5507, is then sent to the discriminator a/d, U5030. The digitized value is temporarily stored in the stc ram, U5118, during the magnetron fire time frame. The 4 sec. pulse from the magnetron is sampled eight times at a 2 sec. delay from the beginning of the pulse. Due to the speed of the samples, the microprocessor can not read eight samples this quickly and so the stc ram is used. At approximately 6 msec after the magnetron has fired, the microprocessor reads the missing pulse fault flag and the high/low voltage flag from the power supply board. If no faults occurred, then the microprocessor reads the contents of the first eight memory locations of the stc ram which holds the discriminator frequency data. The microprocessor then filters the data and determine if the LO is on frequency. If the LO is either too high or too low, then the microprocessor adjusts the digital value being sent to the LO drive circuit. The LO drive circuit consists of three d/a converters. The first d/a converter, U5027 - pin 20, is used to establish the course setting or initial bias of the LO drive. The second d/a converter, U5027 - pin 1, is used for frequency offset. The frequency offset is used to compensate for the fact that during the magnetron fire period, the magnetron produces so much energy that it tends to pull the local oscillator towards the magnetrons frequency. Page 30 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 This pulling causes the local oscillator to be off frequency during the afc sample period which produces an erroneous afc sample. Since the LO pulling is a fixed frequency, the offset is set to a fixed value depending upon the amount of pulling. Both the course and offset values are determined by the afc calibration procedure. The third d/a converter, U5027 pin 2, is the fine adjust. The fine adjust is the active afc output during normal radar operation. This value is generated by the microprocessor as determined by the values received from the discriminator circuit. The outputs from the three d/a converters is then summed at the LO drive op amp, U5144, and then sent to the receiver module. (4) Weather Accumulator and 453 Transmitter The Weather Accumulator and 453 Transmitter circuit receives video data from the video buffer and produce 453 data at the output. This conversion process involves several intermediate steps. The first step is to convert the analog video to compensated digital data. This is accomplished by the video a/d converter, U5036, WX rom, U5038, WX ram, U5039,and stc FPGA, U5037. From the video a/d converter the data is then applied to the WX rom, U5038. The WX rom has three separate input parameters. The first input parameter is the raw digitized video. The second input parameter is weather compensation and the third input parameter is Extended stc, estc. These three parameters, raw video, weather compensation, and estc are applied to the WX roms address lines. When the appropriate address is selected, a compensated digital value is then sent to the WX ram, U5039, and is then saved at the range clock rate. Weather compensation and estc are firmware functions embedded in the stc FPGA, U5037. Weather compensation is used to increase the strength of the video due to the attenuation caused by intervening weather. The weather compensation algorithm sums up the weather returns in a weighted fashion. The yellow is of lsb value, where as the red is of a value of 6, and magenta is a value of 37.

34-40-11

Page 31 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 The sum is in a 12 bit register. The lower 4 bits are truncated leaving the upper 8 bits. The lsb of the weather compensation output to the WX rom is equivalent to 1 dB of intervening weather attenuation. When these values increase in number, they cause the WX rom to increases the digital value of the video to be sent to the WX ram. Extended stc, estc, is used to increase the amplitude of the signal once stc has exhausted its dynamic range, approximately 30 to 35 NM. From 40 NM to 240 NM the address sent to the WX rom will increase every 10 NM. This change in address increases the compensated video being sent to the WX ram. This is not a calibrated compensation such as stc, but it is an attempt to provide the pilot with a more accurate presentation of the weather beyond the stc range. The second step in the process of converting analog video into 453 data is to filter the data using the weather accumulator. The weather accumulator, U5057, provides a filter algorithm which sums 32 radials and produce the filtered output. This filtered output is then stored back into the WX ram and is ready to be converted to 453 data. The third step in the conversion process is to transfer the weather data from the WX ram to the 453 ram. The weather data to 453 data transfer is performed by the 453 FPGA, U5041. This transfer process consists of converting the 8 bit digital data value to a 3 bit color value. Once the color value has been determined, 000-black, 001-green, 010-yellow, 011-red, 100-magenta, the value is then repeated due to the format of the 453 word. The 453 data word allows for 512 range bins. Since only 256 range bin samples have been collected, the number must be doubled to fill in the unused range bins. The microprocessor fills the 453 ram with the first 64 bits of control data. Once the 453 ram is filled with data, the microprocessor commands the 453 FPGA to start transmitting data to the indicator through the 453 data transmitters, U5125. The 453 data consists of 1600 bits of data being sent at a 1 MHz rate. The total word transmission time is 1.6 msec.

Page 32 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 The transmission rate between words is approximately 7.5 msec. (5) Logic and Control The logic and control section consists of four major sections. The first section is the microprocessor and the microprocessor support circuits. The second section consists of the discrete input/output ports. Section three is the 429 receivers and transmitter. The forth section is the multiplexed a/d converter. The microprocessor and support circuits consist of the following chips: Z8400 microprocessor, U5001, software rom, U5003, microprocessor ram, U5004, Microprocessor non-volatile ram, U5005, reset and watchdog chip, U5002, microprocessor chip select FPGA, U5012, FPGA rom, U5013, microprocessor clock, Y5001, and the data buss buffers, U5014, U5015, U5016, and U5126. The discrete input/output ports consist of U5006, U5007, U5008, U5009, U5010, U5011, U5017, U5019, and U5043. The 429 receivers and transmitter consist of U5091 and U5025. The multiplexed a/d converter consists of U5022, U5023, and U5024. Upon unit power up or reset, the reset/watchdog chip, U5002, holds the reset output low until the 5 V supply has become stable. The output of the reset/watchdog chip is applied to U5125, an open collector NAND chip. This output is wired ORed to the four FPGA chips Done Programming (DP) lines which are also open collector outputs. The four FPGAs, U5012, U537, U5041, and U5057, holds their DP lines low until they have been programmed. Once all four FPGAs have been programmed and the 5 V is stable, the microprocessors reset line is pulled high by R5157. The programming of the four FPGAs is controlled by the master FPGA, U5012. The three slaved FPGAs, U5037, U5041, and U5057 is programmed by the master. When power up or reset occurs, the reset circuit in the master FPGA causes the FPGA to go into a self programming mode. In this mode, the master FPGA reads programming data from the FPGA rom, U5013. This data is then sent in serial format from the Data OUT (DOUT) pin of U5012 to the Data IN (DIN) pin of U5041. From the DOUT pin of U5041 the serial

34-40-11

Page 33 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 data is sent to the DIN pin of U5037. The data is then sent out the DOUT pin of U5037 to the DIN pin of U5057. Once an FPGA has been programmed, the DP line is allowed to go high. When all four FPGAs have been programmed, the LCA DONE line, or microprocessor reset, goes high bringing the microprocessor out of reset. Once the microprocessor is out of reset, it will start to execute software code which is stored in the microprocessors rom, U5003. The microprocessor accesses two rams, the first being the static ram, U5004, and the non-volatile ram, U5005. The static ram is used to store variables which are used during normal microprocessor operation and can be lost when the unit is powered down. The non-volatile ram holds data that the microprocessor must save even when the unit is power downed. This data consists, but not limited to, Time of Unit Operation, Unit Fault History, and Receiver Calibration Data. The microprocessors data bus is buffered by U5014, U5015, U5016, and U5126. Due to the number of devices connected to the microprocessors data buss, the microprocessors data buss is divided into four separate data busses to prevent buss loading. The four busses consist of the IOD buss which drives the discrete input/output ports, the SLD buss which controls the slower chips on the data buss, the ALD buss which controls the gyro and 543 data buss, and the SD buss which controls the frequency discriminator and the stc buss. During normal operation, the microprocessor is interrupted at a 409 sec. rate. This rate causes the microprocessor to execute a pre-defined task. These tasks are repeated every 60 interrupts. On interrupts 0, 20, and 40 the microprocessor sends a request to the chip select FPGA to generate the 4 sec. magnetron fire pulse. This magnetron fire pulse is then sent to the pulse forming network on the power supply board.

Page 34 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 There are 5 discrete input ports, U5006, U5007, U5017, U5019, and U5043 and 4 discrete output ports, U5008, U5009, U5010, and U5011. Input port 1, U5006, is the indicator on/off port. This port tells the microprocessor which indicators are on and which 429 channel to listen too. This port also is connected to the strut switch. The strut switch will shut off the transmitter, if connected to the aircraft strut switch (not in radar indicator only installations), when the aircraft is on ground. Input port 2, U5017, is the DIP switch input port. The DIP switch tells the microprocessor what size of antenna is connected to the radar. The remainder of the DIP switches are used for bench test purposes only. DIP switch one and two turns off the transmitter and the antenna motors. DIP switch three, equipment configuration enable, allows the installer to change the contents of the configuration module if enabled. DIP switches four and five determine the antenna size. DIP switch six is used in test mode only when the time, temperature, and fault history needs to be read from the 429 transmitter. DIP switch seven is reserved for future use. DIP switch eight, receiver calibration enable, allows the radar to be calibrated when enabled. Input port 3, U5007, is the receiver calibration port. These inputs, in conjunction with DIP switch eight, allows the radar to be calibrated. These calibration procedures consist of afc calibration, and receiver calibration. Also connected to input port 3 is the gyro sign bits. These bits will be discussed in the gyro input section. Input port 4, U5019, is a general purpose input port. This port accepts input serial data from the configuration module. Also input into this port is the target alert bit from the stc FPGA. When the stc FPGA detects a target beyond the selected range, then this bit is set. Input port 4 is the altitude input port. The altitude information is received in 575, gray code, format. This information is used in the Auto Tilt function which is supported by the ART 2100 only.

34-40-11

Page 35 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 Output port 1 is the mode control port. When the range or mode is changed, this port directs the hardware to react according to the new outputs. When the 320 NM range is selected (ART 2100 only), the bandwidth switch goes high enabling the narrow bandwidth in the if section. Output Port 2 is the machine cycle port. This port controls the timing of the hardware throughout a machine cycle (a machine cycle is the time between magnetron fires). If the mode or range is changed, the stc circuit, 453 circuit, and the weather accumulator circuits are reset. After the magnetron has fired, the radial sum enable toggles from low to high and then back to low. This causes the WX ACC FPGA, U5057, to start the video filtering. After the video filtering has been completed, the microprocessor toggles the weather to 453 transfer bit to initiate the transfer of weather data to the 453 ram. When the 453 data is ready to be transmitted, the 453 enable bit toggles low to cause the 453 FPGA to start 453 transmission. The 429 reset bit resets the 429 LSI chip, U5091, when it is toggled from high to low. Output port 3 is a general purpose port. The microprocessor reads input port 2 to determine what size of antenna the unit has been configured for. If an improper code has been entered at input port 2, then the microprocessor sets the output bits at output port 3 to a 10" antenna. The RDS type output bit is reserved for future use. Wx compensation disable is also reserved for future use. The high voltage disable goes high 60 seconds after the microprocessor has been reset. This bit causes the high voltage to be disabled while the magnetron is warming up. The 429 select bit is used to multiplex 429 ports 3 and 5 to the 429 LSI. Since the 429 LSI has only four input ports, it is necessary to multiplex two ports into one. Output port 4 is the configuration module port. The configuration module is mounted external to the radar and is intended to stay with the aircraft. This module holds the analog gyro gain settings and aircraft equipment configuration.

Page 36 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 This port along with input port 4 talks and listens to the serial non-volatile ram in the configuration module. The third major section of logic and control is the 429 receivers and transmitter. There are five receivers and one transmitter. The first three receivers are connected to indicator/controllers. The forth receiver is used in the aircraft for 429 pitch and roll data input and on the bench for self test and calibration purposes. The fifth 249 receiver is used for altitude data input. Since the 429 LSI, U5091, has only four input ports, the third and fifth inputs are multiplexed through U5025 to the 429 LSI. The 429 transmitter is used for bench test purposes only. The forth major section of logic and control is the multiplexed a/d converter, U5024. Fourteen separate analog inputs are multiplexed through U5022 and U5023 to the a/d converter U5024. Two of the inputs are the temperature sensors which monitor the temperature of the power supply and the pre-amp. Another two inputs are used to read the Hall effect sensors. The Hall effect sensors are used by the microprocessor to determine the position of the antenna. The sensors themselves are located in the Gimbal assembly. The output from the Hall effect sensors are then amplified, U5021 and U5022, and applied to the multiplex a/d converter. The output from the Hall effect circuit will vary from approximately 0.5 V to 4.5 V. The gyro input has been multiplexed by the gyro circuit so that the gyro input line may consist of reference, pitch and roll. The remaining inputs are unit voltages. These voltages are monitored for fault detection. (6) Analog Gyro Input The analog gyro (gyro) input consists of four major sections. The first section is the reference input. The second section is the pitch input. The Third section is the roll input. The fourth section is the programmable amplifier.

34-40-11

Page 37 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 The reference input consists of the following components: differential input amplifier, U5159a and U5163, the rectifier and integrator, U5159b, CR5022, R5294, and C5085, the gain adjust amplifier, U5159c, and the reference chop circuit U5033b. The pitch input consists of the input differential amplifier, U5034a, the rectifier and integrator, U5034b, CR5019, R5083, and C5041, the gain adjust amplifier, U5034c, and the pitch sign bit, U5034d, U5163a, and U5033a. The roll input consists of input differential amplifier, U5035a, the rectifier and integrator, U5035b, CR5011, R5105, and C5056, the gain adjust amplifier, U5035c, and the roll sign bit, U5035d, U5163d, and U5033d. The programmable amplifier consists of the analog multiplex chip, U5162, the gain data buffers, U5169 and U5168, the multiplying d/a converter U5165, the unity gain current to voltage op-amp U6160d, and the fixed gain amplifier U5160a. The gyro inputs are used to stabilize the antenna so that the antenna scans parallel to the earth while the aircraft is in a pitch or roll attitude. The reference input can vary from 10 V rms to 115 V rms. Since the reference voltage is of such a large range, the input amplifier has switchable gains. The configuration module contains data on which range of reference voltages are applied to the unit. There are three different selections which consist of 115V, 26V, and 10V. If 115 V is selected, then U5163 - pin 9 will go high and place R5224 in parallel with R5223 to establish the proper gain. If 26 V is selected, then U5163 - pin 8 will go high and place R5225 in parallel with R5223. If 10 V is selected, then R5223 will be the only resistor in the op-amp feedback network. Once the reference gain has been established at the differential input op-amp, U5159a, the signal is then applied to the detector and integration circuits and the chopper circuit. The detector and integration circuit converts the sign wave into a dc value which is applied to the fixed gain op-amp U5159c. This dc value is then multiplexed to the programmable gain amplifier U5165.

Page 38 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 The reference input differential op-amp also drives the chopper circuit, U5033a. The output from the chopper circuit is used in the pitch and roll circuits to determine the phase of the pitch or roll inputs. If the pitch input is in phase with the reference, then the aircraft is pitched up. If the pitch input is 180 degrees out of phase with the reference input, then the aircraft is pitched down. When the roll input is in phase with the reference, then the aircraft is in a right roll, and when the roll input is 180 degrees out of phase with the reference, then the aircraft is in a left roll. Once all three analog input signals have been rectified and integrated, the dc values are then multiplexed, U5162, and applied to the programmable amplifier, U5165, U5160d, and U5160a. The programmable amplifier consists of a 10 bit d/a converter, a unity gain op-amp, and a gain of 3 op-amp. The total gain of the programmable amplifier can vary from 0 to 3 in 1024 steps. The multiplexed dc value is applied to the reference voltage input of the multiplying d/a converter. When the digital data value is applied to the d/a converter, the reference voltage is then either amplified or attenuated depending upon the digital data. The gain parameters which are determined by the digital data are stored in the configuration module. When the gyros are being calibrated, the digital values being applied to the programmable amplifier are varied until the desired gain is achieved. The output from the programmable amplifier are then sent to the multiplexed a/d converter. The multiplexed a/d converter is discussed in the logic and control section, paragraph 5.B.(5). (7) Antenna Stabilization and Control (a) FPGA Overview Ic U4011 is a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) which is used to control the antenna azimuth and elevation positioning stepper motors and provide interfacing for over_under voltage, missing_pulse and mod_timeout to the microprocessor on the logic board. Page 39 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 The FPGAs configure themselves, every time power is applied, by reading the configuration information from an external eprom, U4010. After the information has been read, and stored in the FPGA, the eprom is no longer needed. This design takes advantage of an available resource by storing the required Sine/Cosine lookup tables in the eprom. (b) Microstepping Motor Controller The controller provides a register based interface to the microprocessor and utilizes microstepping to provide smooth quiet scanning action. Two separate two phase stepper motors (one for azimuth and one for tilt) are controlled to position the antenna. The motor drive operation is similar so only the Azimuth axis motor will be described. Rather than driving the motor windings with pulses of current to step its position, sinusoidal currents are used. The current flowing in each winding of the two motors passes through sense resistors (R4139,R4140,R4130 and R4142, R4143, R4031) producing a voltage (AZ_SENS1 and AZ_SENS2) which is proportional to the motor current. This voltage is compared to the voltage programmed by the FPGA into U4013, a quad dac. The controller uses a pulse width modulated drive system to try and keep the two voltages equal. By using a sequence of values which produce a sine wave when written to the dac, the motor current produced is also a sine wave. By controlling the phase between the two windings, the motor can be moved in either direction. One full cycle of sine/cosine currents applied to the motors represents 4 full steps, or 128 microsteps. Each step of the motor, 1.8 degrees, through gearing of 36:1, produces a rotation of the antenna of 0.05 degrees. Each microstep is then equal to 0.0015625 degrees. To produce the required 25 deg/sec. scanning rate, the microstep clocking rate must be 16 kHz. Lower clocking rates are used in Soft Start and Soft Stop modes to provide accelerated starting and decelerated stopping for smoother operation. Page 40 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 1.8 deg/step/36 = 0.05 deg/step 0.05 deg/32 steps = 0.0015625 deg/step 25 deg/sec./0.0015625 deg/step = 16000 step/ sec. = 16 kHz Counters are used to hold the current position of each axis. The outputs from these counters not only address the Sine/Cosine table in the eprom, but are also made available to the processor for monitoring the present position of the antenna. These counters are 18 bits in length and have a range of 218 X 0.0015625 = 409.6, or 204.8. The upper 13 bits are returned to the system providing a range of 204.8, with a resolution of 0.05. The lower 7 bits of each axis counter are used to address the Sine/Cosine table in the eprom to get the values to be written to the current controlling dacs. (c) Motor Controller Timing The system timing is derived from a 1.025 MHz oscillator, Y4001, connected to the pin 30 of the FPGA (U4011). Internally, this main clock input is fed to an eight bit counter. The outputs of this counter form the main system state machine, scheduling all events which occur. The lower six bits cycle at a 16 kHz rate, forming the main dac update cycle. Each of the four dacs is updated once per cycle. The PWM outputs and chopper drives to the motors are updated at a 32 kHz rate, thus the motor current is corrected twice for each new value written to the dac. The upper two bits are utilized in the Tilt and Azimuth clock generator functions to allow 1/4 and 1/2 rate scanning for the Soft Start / Soft Stop modes. All interactions with the microprocessor occur asynchronously to the FPGA controller. These interactions take the form of single byte, read/write cycles, transferring data from/to the FPGA. When the transfer affects the mode of the controller, the inputs are synchronized to the controller before allowing the controller to respond to them, guaranteeing synchronous transition between different modes.

34-40-11

Page 41 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 When the transfer reads one of the motor counters, the value being returned is latched at the beginning of the transfer to prevent it from changing during the transfer. (d) Eprom/Dac Interface The FPGA requires that a certain subset of its pins be connected to an external memory device from which it can download configuration information after power is applied. Since this design also accesses Sine/Cosine lookup tables from the same memory device, those same pins were used for the signals which the controller uses to access the tables. A signal from the FPGA, EA16 = HDC = Hi-DuringConfiguration, is a logical 1 during configuration and driven to a logical 0 during normal operation. This is used for the MSB of the eprom address, thus the lower half of the eprom contains the Sine/Cosine tables and the upper half contains the configuration data. During configuration, the FPGA downloads data from the eprom, sequentially outputting an address and then clocking the returned data into one of its internal registers to define the circuit to be implemented. During normal operation, the FPGA outputs an address, EA0..EA15, composed of the lower seven bits of each motors counter and two additional bits, from the main system state machine, which select one of four outputs to be updated. The eprom must then have 17 address inputs, (2 X 7)+2+1=17. This design utilizes a 27C010, 128K X 8 eprom for this purpose. The eprom data lines, ED0..ED7, are not used inside the FPGA except during configuration. During normal operation, the FPGA outputs the address of a given row from the table. The data from the eprom then goes directly to the dac, where it awaits the write strobe and channel select bits from the FPGA to clock it into the appropriate dac.

Page 42 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 (e) Motor Interface The controller interfaces to the motor with four comparators, (U4012A and U4012B for Azimuth and U4012C and U4012D for Elevation) which compare the programmed dac voltages and the voltages developed across the four current sense resistors. The outputs of the four comparators form reset signals, AZ_RST1(2), EL_RST1(2), which modulate the width, or time on, of their respective driver by clearing its drive signals when the current level exceeds the programmed level. Each driver requires three signals to control its operation; two direction controls and a strobe. The FPGA outputs these signals, synchronized to the main system state machine. The direction controls select which direction the current flows through the motor when enabled by the strobe. When current flow is desired, one of the drivers direction signals will be set to a logical 1, the other set to 0. Current begins to flow, and increase, until the value exceeds the programmed value. The reset signal then clears both direction signals, connecting both sides of the motor to ground, allowing the current to continue to flow, and decrease. This process is repeated at a 32 kHz rate for each of the four drivers. These signals include : AZ_OUT1A(B), AZ_OUT2A(B), EL_OUT1A(B), and EL_OUT2A(B). The third signal needed is the strobe, which forms the Chopper Drive to enable the driver. The motor drivers, U4033 and U4034 for Azimuth and U4049 and U4050 for Elevation, are power MOSFET H-Bridge configurations. The chopper uses different duty cycles depending on what portion of the sine wave is being produced. During the current charge quarter cycle, the chopper duty cycle is 100%, allowing the PWM reset signals to fully control the final conduction time. During the first half of the current decay quarter cycle, the chopper duty cycle is reduced to 75%. The second half of this quarter cycle reduces the duty cycle further to 50%. These signals include: AZ_EN, AZ_EN(NOT), EL_EN, and EL_EN(NOT).

34-40-11

Page 43 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 (f) Microprocessor Interface The microprocessor interfaces to the controller by accessing four registers within the FPGA. The interface consists of the microprocessor data bus(D0...D7), address bus(A0,A1), timing strobes (RD(NOT),WR(NOT)), and address strobe(MTR_SEL(NOT)). The four registers are detailed below: Read Address Base+0 Base+1 Base+2 Base+3 Function Az Count Lo Byte Az Count Hi Byte Ti Count Lo Byte Ti Count Hi Byte D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 P1 P2 AB 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 P3 x TB 17 16 15 14 13

FPGA Registers Read Address Table 7 AB, TB are Azimuth Busy, Tilt Busy, respectively. 1 indicates that the controller is in the process of starting or stopping. P1,P2,P3 are discrete inputs to the FPGA which are made available for monitoring by the processor. P1,P2 are sampled on the trailing edge of the AFC_SAMPLE pulse input to the FPGA. Write Address Base+0 Base+1 Base+2 Base+3 P1 = OVER_UNDER_VOLTAGE , 0 = ERROR P2 = MISSING_PULSE , 1 = ERROR P3 = MODULATOR_TIME_OUT , 1 = TIME OUT D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0

Function Azimuth Command Ignored Tilt Command Ignored

Write Address Table 8

Page 44 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0 = = = = = = = = Counter Reset Not Used Not Used Not Used Stop Motor Hold Motor Hard Start/Stop Direction , 1 = reset

, 0 = stop , 0 = hold , 1 = hard , 1 = right, up

Hold mode, C2=0, allows all motor functions to work as normal with the exception that the chopper signals to the output drivers are never activated. This mode is intended for diagnostic purposes only. Hard Stop, C1=1, C3=0, causes the motor to stop at the next available full step position, microstep=0. The rate changes directly from full (16 kHz) to zero. Hard Start, C1=1, C3=1, causes the motor to start moving. The rate changes directly from zero to full (16 kHz). Soft Stop, C1=0, C3=0, causes the motor to perform a soft stop sequence consisting of 1 full step (32 microsteps) at 1/2 rate (8 kHz), followed by 1 full step at 1/4 rate (4 kHz) and then stop. Soft Start, C1=0, C3=1, causes the motor to perform a soft start sequence consisting of 1 full step (32 microsteps) at 1/4 rate, (4 kHz), followed by 1 full step at 1/2 rate (8 kHz) and then full rate (16 kHz) until stopped.

34-40-11

Page 45 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 46 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
TESTING AND FAULT ISOLATION 1. General This section contains instructions for functional testing, troubleshooting, and aligning the ART 2000. The functional test is a cover-on test performed to determine the operational status of the unit. The alignment procedures are performed after a misalignment has been isolated during troubleshooting, when a module or component that requires alignment has been replaced, or to set adjustable parameters to customer specifications. 2. Test Equipment Required Refer to "Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment" section of this manual, beginning on page 9001, for information relating to test equipment that is required for testing, troubleshooting, and aligning the unit. 3. Functional Test Procedures A. General The purpose of the functional testing is to determine the operational status of the ART 2000. As such, the functional test may be used to check a new unit, a unit which has been in storage, or a unit which has been removed from an aircraft or storage. The functional test shall be performed with the unit fully assembled and no internal adjustments shall be made to the unit. Refer to figure 1001 for a suggested test setup.

Typical Test Setup


Figure 1001

34-40-11

Page 1001 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

If the unit tests within the limits given, no further testing is required and the unit is considered suitable for installation in an aircraft. If the unit fails any portion of the functional test, isolate the fault.

WARNING: THIS INSTRUMENT GENERATES MICROWAVE RADIATION.

DO NOT OPERATE UNTIL YOU HAVE READ AND CAREFULLY FOLLOWED ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE OPERATION AND SERVICE MANUALS. VOLTAGES. THE TECHNICIAN OR OPERATOR SHOULD OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING ANY TESTS OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION. RF LOAD MUST BE CONNECTED BEFORE TRANSMITTING. SITIVE (ESDS) DEVICES. UNIT MODULES AND INDIVIDUAL ESDS DEVICES MUST BE HANDLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIAL ESDS HANDLING PROCEDURES. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO ESDS DEVICES.

WARNING: OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT INVOLVES THE USE OF HIGH

CAUTION: THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SEN-

B.

Initial Test Equipment Setup (1) (2) (3) (4) Set the IN 182A function selector to the off position. Connect the ART 2000 to the test harness. Connect the dummy load to the ART using the adapter plate in the bench test kit (050-03299-0000). Set S1 on the tester for RT ON(NOT)/OFF #1 and S2 for input to Control Bus #1 .

C.

Return To Service Test Procedures (1) Voltage and Current Check (a) (b) (c) (d) Turn on the test equipment, leaving the IN 182A function selector in the OFF position. Check the ammeter on the 28 V power supply. should read less than 25 ma. It

Set the IN 182A to the ON position. Set the power supply to 27.5 V dc. The ammeter should read less than 3.0 Amps.

Page 1002 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(2) (3) Refer to Section 2.4 of the RDR 2000 Installation Manual (Part Number 006-00643-00XX. Sensitivity Time Control (stc) (a) Set the function selector on the IN 182A to the ON position and select Wx mode. Set the range to 40 NM. Set the target width to 35 sec. If the ART being tested is configured for a 10 inch antenna, refer to table 1001 for target distance, signal level and color relationship. If the ART is configured for a 12 inch antenna, refer to table 1002. The following is the ART 2000 Weather Avoidance Radar Return to Service Check List.

(b) (c)

NOTE:

34-40-11

Page 1003 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
ART 2000 Weather Avoidance Radar Return to Service Check List Serial Number__________ PROC STEP (1) TEST DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CHECKS Off Current On Current MEASURED DATA (Page 1 of 2) (REV. 2) LIMITS CONDITIONS

________Amps <0.025 amps ________Amps 3.0 amps Max.

(2)

System Configuration and Calibration Antenna Clearance ________ (OK) Stabilization Calibration Analog Source 400 Hz Pitch (up 10) Pitch (down 10) Pitch (level 0) Roll (right 30) Roll (left 30) Roll (level 0) 429 Source Pitch (up 10) Pitch (down 10) Pitch (level 0) Roll (right 20) Roll (left 20) Roll (level 0)

________(OK) ________(OK) ________(OK) ________(OK) ________(OK) ________(OK) ________(OK) ________(OK) ________(OK) ________(OK) ________(OK) ________(OK) ________(OK)

0.0 0.5 10.0 U 1 10.0 D 1 0.0 1 30.0 R 1 30.0 L 1 0.0 1 10.0 U 1 10.0 D 1 0.0 1 20.0 R 1 20.0 L 1 0.0 1

(3) Sensitivity Time Control (stc) Antenna Size (IN) 12 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 10 10 Range Display (NM) 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 Target Dist (NM) 20 20 20 20 20 10 10 10 10 20 Signal Level

Width (uS) 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35

Color (30%) GRN YEL RED MAG RED GRN YEL RED MAG RED

______(OK) ______(OK) ______(OK) ______(OK)

-99 3dBm -90 3dBm -82 3dBm -78 3dBm

______(OK) -88 3dBm ______(OK) -101 3dBm ______(OK) -92 3dBm ______(OK) -84 3dBm ______(OK) -80 3dBm ______(OK) -91 3dBm

Page 1004 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

34-40-11

Page 1005 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

NOTE:
TARGET DISTANCE (NM) 20 20 20 20

BE AWARE THAT THRESHOLD LEVELS AND TOLERANCE RANGES MIGHT OVERLAP. SIGNAL LEVEL ( 6 dBm) -87 -91 -99 -108 Table 1001 STC with 10 Inch Antenna COLOR (30%) MAGENTA RED YELLOW GREEN

NOTE:
TARGET DISTANCE (NM) 20 20 20 20

BE AWARE THAT THRESHOLD LEVELS AND TOLERANCE RANGES MIGHT OVERLAP. SIGNAL LEVEL ( 6 dBm) -84 -88 -96 -105 Table 1002 STC With 12 Inch Antenna COLOR (30%) MAGENTA RED YELLOW GREEN

(4)

Pulse Repetition Frequency (prf) (a) Connect the output of the RD 300 or equivalent to the scope. Set the PWR/F control on the RD 300 to the PWR position. Set the PRF/RF switch to the PRF position. Set the IN 182A function selector to the ON position and set to Wx mode. The frequency should read 106 Hz 5 Hz.

(b) (c)

Page 1006 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(5) Transmitter Frequency and Power (a) (b) (c) (6) Set the PRF/RF switch on the RD 300 to the RF position. The frequency should read 9375 MHz 30 MHz. The power output should be from 2.5 kW to 6 kW.

Transmitted Pulse Width (a) The pulse width shown on the scope should be 3.85 to 4.35 sec.

(7)

Automatic Gain Control (agc) (a) (b) (c) Set the RD 300 for an rf level of -120 dBm. Set the IN 182A to Wx mode with a range of 240 NM. There should be a maximum of 5 noise dots averaged over several sweeps.

(8)

Automatic Frequency Control (afc) (a) (b) (c) Set the PWR/F switch on the RD 300 to F. Set the F OFFSET to CAL. tered at 0. To meter should be cen-

Adjust the F OFFSET for a maximum peak. There should be less than 200 kHz difference from the CAL position.

(9)

Antenna Scan (a) Set the IN 812A to the ON position in Horizontal Scan. Verify Full Deflection of 100. Verify that the scan time for one sweep is 4 0.5 seconds. Push the VP Button on the IN812 to Vertical Profile. Verify full bottom to top motion. Set the IN812 to the SBY position. Verify that the antenna parks with 0 Azimuth and Tilt at -30.

(b) (c)

(10) High and Low Voltage Check (a) (b) (c) Set the power supply voltage to 32 V dc. should operate normally. Set the power supply voltage to 20 V dc. should operated normally. The unit The unit

Set the power supply voltage to 27.5 V dc.

34-40-11

Page 1007 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(11) RT ON/OFF Discretes (a) (b) (c) (d) Set the IN 182A function selector to the OFF position. Set S1 on the bench tester/harness to the #2 input. Set the IN 182A function selector to the ON position. The ART shall come on and function normally. Set the IN 182A function selector to the OFF position. The ART shall power down after reaching the park position. Set S1 to the #3 position and repeat steps (c) and (d). Return S1 to the #1 position.

(e) (f)

(12) Strut Switch Remove the bench test Configuration Module from the test setup. Place the module in the KPA 900 Configuration Module Programmer. Configure the bench test Configuration Module to disable the strut switch override. Refer to the KPA 900 Operators Guide (P/N 006-05392-00XX) for this procedure. Return the module to the test setup. (a) (b) Power Up. Go to the ON Mode.

Apply 3.5 Vdc to the bench tester/harness STRUT SWITCH IN. The ART should stop transmitting and show a TX_FLT. Remove the 3.5 Vdc. mitting. The ART should begin trans-

(c)

(13) Gyro Fault Program configuration Mod for Analog Gyros (a) (b) (c) Set the IN 182A to Wx mode. pushing in the Tilt Knob. Turn the STAB ON by

Remove all gyro inputs. The word STAB OFF should be displayed on the screen. Reconnect the gyro inputs.

(14) DIP Switch (a) Check the Dip Switch on the Logic Board. They are accessible through the small window near the connector harness. S5001 - 1, 2, and 7 should be ON. S5001 - 3, 6, and 8 should be OFF. Switch - 4 and 5 should be set for attached antenna. Please see Installation Manual(006-0643-00XX).

Page 1008 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
4. Troubleshooting Procedures A. Procedure to investigate system faults with the RDR 2000. System level faults are annunciated by an alternating (flashing) ANT and TX fault on the indictor display when in TEST mode.

(1)

Objectives (a) The objective of this document is to inform those investigating and maintaining the RDR 2000 tools available to assist diagnosis of problems. This document is to provide a concise diagnostic reference for engineering and service personnel.

(b) (2)

Background (a) The RDR 2000 has internal diagnostic software which interrogates itself to determine problems or potential problems. When a failure is located, flag is set, and annunciated by alternating ANT/TX faults in TEST mode. An EFIS simply enters the ASCII text pages and all diagnostics may be evaluated. The indicators, such as the IN 182 do not have text pages. A special provision has been created in the maintenance pages.

(b)

(3)

Scope This document outlines the procedures to determine the extended error codes for system faults. EFIS ASCII text pages are briefly outlined but are not explicitly "walked through". The extended error codes from an indicator are explained.

B.

Viewing System Errors with an EFIS This is simply the case of entering the EFIS ASCII text pages and selecting 453 radar bus. The ART will provide text to allow the operator to navigate and to investigate all functionality of the ART. The screens exists to display the following: hours of operation, temperatures, failures, voltage levels, etc. Consult the EFIS Manual for more information.

34-40-11

Page 1009 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
C. Viewing System Errors with an Indicator An indicator such as the IN 182 does not provide text pages. Therefore a flashing code system has been implemented. The codes flash with a header then a four code sequence. Enter TEST Mode, a system fault is indicated by alternating ANT and TX faults. Enter the Maintenance Mode (simultaneously depress the Wx and VP buttons). To begin receiving the extended codes change tilt to +15 degrees.
GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO H Volt H Volt H Volt H Volt H Volt H Volt AFC AFC AFC AFC AFC AFC AGC AGC AGC AGC AGC AGC GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO H Volt H Volt AFC AFC AGC AGC GYRO GYRO AFC AFC AGC AGC H Volt H Volt GYRO GYRO AGC AGC H Volt H Volt AFC AFC GYRO GYRO H Volt H Volt AFC AFC 400 Hz 400 Hz AFC AGC H Volt AGC H Volt AFC AFC AGC AGC GYRO GYRO AFC GYRO AGC H Volt AGC H Volt GYRO AFC GYRO H Volt GYRO H Volt AFC AFC 400 Hz H Volt 400 Hz H Volt AFC AGC AFC AGC H Volt AFC H Volt AGC AFC GYRO AGC AFC GYRO AGC GYRO AGC H Volt GYRO H Volt GYRO AFC GYRO H Volt AFC H Volt 400 Hz AFC 400 Hz H Volt AFC H Volt /* /* /* /* /* /* /* /* /* /* /* /* /* /* /* /* ROM FAULT*/ RAM FAULT*/ NVRAM FAULT*/ STC RAM FAULT*/ CM HW FAULT*/ CM DATA FAULT*/ AIR TEMP ALARM*/ UNIT TEMP ALARM*/ +5V FAULT*/ +8V FAULT*/ +9V FAULT*/ +15V FAULT*/ -15V FAULT*/ 24V FAULT*/ 28V FAULT*/ Tuning Voltage*/

/*AGC FAULT*/ /*Spare*/ /*Spare*/ /*Spare*/ /*High Voltage FAULT*/ /*Missing Pulse FAULT*/ /*AFC FAULT*/ /*SPARE FAULT*/ /*H/W Counter FAULT*/ /*Limit Exceeded FAULT*/ /*No Ant Movement FAULT* /*Tracking exceeds limit FAULT*/ /*ANT 5 FAULT*/ /*SPARE FAULT*/

D.

ART 2000 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES The following is a recommended sequence of events when troubleshooting a logic board for the ART 2000. It is recommended that the logic board be placed in a unit with a known good power supply, receiver, magnetron, and gymbol assembly. (1) Turn on power to unit and set the indicator to standby - if the indicator shows IN FLT 6 in the lower right corner, then do steps (2) through (4). If not, the motors should go through an initialization which will cause the antenna to bounce against the mechanical stops. Then go to step (5).

Page 1010 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(2) Check the power supply voltages at the following test points: TP TP TP TP 10 11 12 13 +5 volts +15 volts -15 volts +24 volts

If there are no voltages, check the ON/OFF line at J2P14 for a low voltage. Check for solder shorts. If the 5 volt line is low, all other voltages will be low. (3) Check signal at TP 22 (LCA_DONE). When the power is cycled from OFF to ON, the LCA_DONE signal should be observed. If the LCA_DONE (TP 22) line goes high and stays high after approximately 1.7 seconds, then the FPGAs and Microprocessor are working (See figure 1002). If the LCA_DONE line does not go high after approximately 1.7 seconds, then the FPGAs did not load correctly. Check the soldering of the FPGA pins and also U13. If the LCA_DONE line goes high after approximately 1 second, but then goes low again, then the FPGAs loaded correctly, but the microprocessor is not working (See figure 1003). Check the soldering of the microprocessor (U1), the microprocessor ROM socket (U3), and the microprocessor RAM (U4). (4) Check 453 Transmitter at TP 20 and TP 15 for 453 data (See figures 1004, 1005, and 1006). 453 data consists of 1600 bits at a 1 MHz rate. The "packet" of data should last 1.6 msec. The amplitude of the voltage should be at least 2 volts. Check the soldering of pins on the 453 FPGA (U41), 453 RAM (U59), and the 453 Driver (U125). Turn the indicator from standby to test and then check to see if the unit changes modes. If the unit stays in standby then no test pattern will be displayed and no antenna movement. Check the 429 receiver circuits (Page 6 of the schematic). Waveform is shown in figure 1007.

(5)

34-40-11

Page 1011 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1002 Normal Microprocessor and FPGA Turn-on

Page 1012 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1003 FPGAs programmed correctly, but microprocessor is inoperative

34-40-11

Page 1013 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1004 Start Sync of 453 Transmission

Page 1014 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1005 Stop Sync of 453 Transmission

34-40-11

Page 1015 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1006 Data Packet of 453 Transmission

Page 1016 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1007 Received 429 Data

34-40-11

Page 1017 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(6) If the IF alignment has not been performed, then it should be done at this time. If the IF does not align, check for open inductor on the +15 volt inputs into each stage. Check the Manual Gain and STC/AGC voltage at TP 7 and TP 2. With the unit in standby or test, the voltages should be around 7 volts. If the Manual Gain is not working properly, then check the soldering of U27 and U28. If the STC/AGC is not working properly, then check the soldering of STC FPGA (U37), STC RAM (U118), STC D/A (U119), and STC Driver (U122). (8) Now perform the AFC calibration procedure. The following is the AFC calibration procedure sequence of events: AFC Course - LO Tuning Voltage starts at approximately 15 volts and sweeps down. AFC Fine - This voltage (U27-P2) will start at 5 volts and sweep down to 2.5 volts. AFC Offset - This voltage will start at 5 volts (U27-P1) and sweep down to 0 volts. (a) (b) Check the LO Tuning voltage at TP 6. should be around 8 volts. This voltage

(7)

If AFC Course does not lock, then check the following: 1 2 The Quad DAC (U27) should output 0 to 5 volts on pins 1, 2, 19, and 20. The AFC Course (U27-P20) should start at 5 volts and sweep down. If the LO Tuning voltage stops at approximately 8 volts, then the AFC Course should be at approximately 3.4 volts. If the AFC Course does not lock, then check the signal at the Video A/D (TP 23). The AFC course circuit will read the Video A/D in search for a signal at approximately 200 NM. If the AFC Course calibration procedure does not find a target at 100 NM, then it will continue to sweep.

(c)

If AFC Fine does not lock, then check the following: 1 If the AFC Fine keeps on sweeping, then check the input signal to the Discriminator A/D. If this signal is correct (See figures 1008 through 1012), then check the A/Ds outputs.

Page 1018 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
2 The Discriminator A/Ds output will be stored in the first eight locations of the STC RAM. If the outputs from the A/D are correct, then check the operation of the STC RAM.

(9)

Now perform Detector calibration procedures. The detector calibration will calibrate the STC Curves, Manual Gain Curves, Color Thresholds, and Weather Compensation Thresholds. Check the STC and Manual Gain voltage at TP2 and TP7. If the voltages are not correct, then see Step (7) for circuit details.

(10) Check to see if the indicator is showing a target at 100 NM. With a target of approximately -100 dBm, a green band should be displayed at 100 NM. (a) If the indicator is not displaying a target at 100 NM, then check the following: 1 2 Check the video for a signal at TP 23, if not signal, then go back to step 7. Check out the three sources of data to the Wx ROM (U38). a b c 3 4 5 6 Weather data from the Video A/D (U36 VID_0 to VID_7). Weather Compensation from STC FPGA (U37 - WCAO to WCA5). (See figure 1013). ESTC data from STC FPGA (U37 - ESA0 to ESA3). See figure 1014).

Check the output from the Wx ROM (U38) to the input of Wx RAM (U39). (See figure 1015). Check the address to the Wx RAM (U39). figure 1016). Check the radial summation. 1015 and 1016). (See

(See figures

Check the radial transfer from Wx RAM (U39) to the 453 RAM (U59). (See figure 1017).

(11) Apply the gyro input signals to the unit. Check the voltages at TP 27. These voltages shall vary as the gyro simulator is changed in pitch or roll or reference. (See figures 1018 and 1019). (12) If the configuration Module has been read correctly, the gyro outputs should be of proper amplitudes (reference should be around 2.5 volts.)

34-40-11

Page 1019 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(13) Now turn the unit OFF and then back ON to the Test Mode. Check to see if the antenna "soft starts". This will check the Hall sensor input circuits and the multiplexed A/D. (See figures 1020 and 1021). (14) Now select the 80 NM range in the Test Mode. Check the temperature of the unit to see if the logic board temperature sensor circuit is working. (Red band at approximately 25 NM).

Figure 1008 Discriminator input to the Discriminator A/D

Page 1020 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1009 Discriminator input to the Discriminator A/D

34-40-11

Page 1021 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1010 STC Curve and Manual Gain for Weather

Page 1022 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1011 STC Curve and Manual Gain for Map

34-40-11

Page 1023 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1012 STC Curve and Manual Gain for Weather over multiple Mag fires

Page 1024 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1013 Weather Compensation Bit 0

34-40-11

Page 1025 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1014 Extended STC Bit 0

Page 1026 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1015 Compensated Weather Data Bit 3

34-40-11

Page 1027 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1016 Weather RAM Address 0

Page 1028 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1017 Radial Data Transfer from WX_RAM to 453_RAM

34-40-11

Page 1029 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1018 Reference, Pitch, and Roll Inputs

Page 1030 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1019 Reference, Pitch, and Roll Inputs

34-40-11

Page 1031 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1020 Pitch Hall Sensor to MUX A/D

Page 1032 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1021 Azimuth Hall Sensor to MUX A/D

34-40-11

Page 1033 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
E. The sequence for the testing and troubleshooting of the Power Supply board for the ART 2000 should proceed using the following guidelines. It is recommended that a known good Logic Board be placed in the unit prior to testing the Motor Drive circuitry. (1) Turn on the power to the unit and set the indicator to STBY. Check the power supply voltages at the following test points: L5 L8 L7 L6 CR16-Anode CR17-Cathode (a) = = = = = = +5.2 V +9.3 V +24 V +26.25 V +15 V +15 V 0.25 Vdc 1.00 Vdc 2.5 Vdc 0.5 Vdc/-1.0 Vdc 1.5 Vdc 1.5 Vdc

If there are no voltages at any of the above test points, check the fuse (F1), the ON/OFF circuitry associated with Q18, and confirm that the aircraft +28 volt buss is not greater than +36 Vdc. If +28 volts is present at L6 but either the +5 volt or +9.3 volt line is low or absent, check for shorts to ground on all the low voltage supply outputs. Also confirm the presence of the correct waveforms at TP10, TP11, and T5-4. See figures 1022, 1023, and 1024. If the +28 volt line is low at L6 and both the +5 volt and the +9.3 volt lines are present, check for a shorted motor driver (U33, U34, U49, or U50), a shorted Flyback Switch (Q1), a short on the +28 volt filtered line, or a failure in the ON/OFF latching circuitry (U8, U20, and associated circuitry). If the +5 volt line is low, check for shorts on the +5 volt, -15 volt, +15 volt, and the +24 volt busses, or that the FPGA (U11) has not booted up correctly.

(b)

(c)

(d)

CAUTION: If (U11) does not boot up correctly, it

will become extremely hot. Operation in this condition for an excess of fifteen (15) minutes may cause damage and require it to be replaced.

Page 1034 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

+5 Vdc Pulse Width Modulator Output TP10 10 V/Div 5 sec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1022 (TP10) Normal Operation of the +5 Vdc Pulse Width Modulator (U5)

34-40-11

Page 1035 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

+9.3 Vdc Pulse Width Modulator Output TP11 10 V/Div 5 sec/Div X 10 Internal Positive Figure 1023

(TP11) Normal Operation of the +9.3 Vdc Pulse Width Modulator (U6)

Page 1036 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

-15 Vdc Flyback Output T5-4 20 V/Div 5 sec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1024 (T5-4) Normal Operation of the -15 Vdc Flyback Winding (T5)

34-40-11

Page 1037 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(e) (f) If the +9.3 volt line is low, check for shorts on the outputs of T2 and J1. If the fuse blows repeatedly upon turn-on, check for line to line shorts on the output of the +5 volt or the 0.3 volt supplies, incorrect polarity of the aircraft +28 volt buss, or a short to ground through a filter capacitor on the aircraft +28 volt buss.

(2)

To check the Transmitter time-out timer, turn the indicator function switch to OFF and allow it to remain OFF for 30 seconds. Cycle through STBY to ON while monitoring the time period until either the transmitter fires or U2-2 goes high. This time period may vary from 40-90 seconds. If the output at U2-2 does not go high after a reasonable period of time, check the circuitry in and around U2A. In the event that the transmitter does not fire after the time-out period has expired, either no transmit pulse is present or no high voltage is present, proceed through the following steps. (a) No detected RF pulse 1 Confirm that there is a valid MAG_FIRE_OUT signal from the Logic board. See Figure 1025 (U20-2) Confirm that there is a valid Long Pulse Gate at U20-13. See Figure 1026 (U20-13). This gate enables U54A to pass a valid MAG_FIRE_OUT signal while at the same time preventing a dc level from triggering the transmitter on continuously. Confirm that there is a MAG_FIRE pulse at TP8. See figure 1027 (TP8). Confirm that there is a valid Modulator Switch Drive pulse at TP5. See figure 1028 (TP5). A continuous low here could indicate that Q3 is shorted, while a continuous high could indicate that Q2 is shorted. If Q2 is found to be shorted, suspect a Drain to Gate failure of Q4 caused by overvoltage. If an overvoltage condition is suspected, open the circuit to troubleshoot by removing Q4 and verifying the operation of both the Modulator Switch Fet Gate and High Voltage Overvoltage circuitry. (High Voltage = 375 Vdc Maximum). See figure 1029 (TP4).

3 4

Page 1038 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
5 Confirm that you have a high-voltage pulse at the Drain of Q4. See figure 1030 (CR 5 Cathode). If there is no high voltage pulse, check for shorts to ground on the primary side of T2. Also check the operation of the high-voltage supply.

(b)

In the event that a pulse is present at the gate of Q4 but not at the Drain, the next step is to check the High-voltage Power Supply.

(3)

No detected RF Pulse

WARNING: OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT INVOLVES THE USE

OF HIGH VOLTAGES. THE TECHNICIAN OR OPERATOR SHOULD OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING ANY TESTS OUT- LINED IN THIS SECTION.

(a)

Check the high-voltage supply after time-out at CR4-Cathode or at L9. The voltage should be between 285 to 375 Vdc. See figure 1031 (Jct L9CR4). If the voltage is absent, shut down the power to the unit and check for short circuits on the primary of T2. If a short is found, suspect a shorted Q4, CR1, C11, C13, or a short from the primary of T2 to ground. If no short circuits are found, then the high-voltage supply and its controlling circuitry are suspect.

(b)

Check that the HV_ENABLE input from the Logic board is low. If there is a low present, check for the correct waveform at TP1. See figure 1032. If this voltage is 2 0.5 Vdc, then continue. If the voltage at TP1 is 0 Vdc check Q10, Q28, or U18C and their associated circuitries. These components make up the overvoltage sense circuit and a short circuit failure here can cause the power supply to shut down completely. However, an open circuit failure here can cause the output of the high-voltage supply to reach 800 Vdc or more depending on the input voltage.

(c)

CAUTION:THIS CONDITION EVEN MOMENTARILY, WILL

PROBABLY REQUIRE THE REPLACEMENT OF SEVERAL COMPONENTS IN THE HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITRY.

(d)

If the high-voltage is absent or low but TP1 has the correct waveform, check that TP14 has a higher voltage than TP1. If TP14 does not have a higher voltage than TP1, remove power from the unit and remove R204 from the circuit. This will open the Pulse Height Regulator servo loop in order to complete troubleshooting the high-voltage supply.

34-40-11

Page 1039 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
After turn-on and time-out, the high-voltage output at L9 should be 370 5 Vdc. If not, troubleshoot the high-voltage power supply Controller Oscillator at U1-7. See figure 1033 (U1-7). (e) If the Oscillator is functioning check the output of the UC2843 Pulse Width Modulator at U1-10. See figure 1034 (U1-10). If there is an output present at U1-10 (even if much narrower than Figure 1034) consider the Pulse Width Modulator okay and continue checking the high-voltage power supply by verifying that the waveform at TP2, is similar to Figure 1035 (TP2). This waveform is the flyback signal and is true during the period of time that Q1 is turned OFF. The amplitude of this signal varies with the input signal and the output load. An open circuit would cause this voltage to dramatically increase in value while a short circuit would dramatically lower this signal. Operating the ART 2000 without a MAG_FIRE pulse (no load) will force the Pulse Width Modulator to burst cycle and lower the duty cycle dramatically.

Page 1040 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Logic Board MAG_FIRE_OUT U20-2 1 V/Div 1 sec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive Figure 1025 (U20-2) MAG_FIRE_OUT Pulse From Logic Board

34-40-11

Page 1041 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Modulator Trigger Long Pulse Gate U20-13 1 V/Div 1 sec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive Figure 1026 (U20-13) Long Pulse Gate

Page 1042 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Modulator Trigger TP8 1 V/Div 1 sec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive

Figure 1027 (TP8) Mag Fire Pulse

34-40-11

Page 1043 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Switch Driver Input TP5 5 V/Div 1 sec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive

Figure 1028 (TP5) Modulator Switch Drive

Page 1044 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Modulator Switch Drive TP4 5 V/Div 1 sec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive

Figure 1029 (TP4) Modulator Switch FET Gate

34-40-11

Page 1045 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Modulator Switch Voltage Drain Q4 100 V/Div 1 sec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive

Figure 1030 (CR5 Cathode) Modulator Transformer Primary Voltage

Page 1046 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Hi Volt P/S Refresh Rate Jct L9-CR 10 V/Div AC coupled 2 msec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive

Figure 1031 (Jct L9-CR4) Normal Signal for the High Voltage Power Supply Refresh Rate with Magnetron Current Set to 3 Amps, 100 Hz PRF Rate

34-40-11

Page 1047 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

HV P/S Controller Output Compensation TP1 500 mV/Div 2 sec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1032 (TP1) Normal Signal at the Overvoltage Control Frequency Compensation Port of the HV P/S PWM

Page 1048 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

HV P/S Controller Oscillator U1-7 500 mV/Div 5 sec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1033 (U1-7) Normal Signal at the Oscillator Port of the HV P/S PWM Controller U1-7

34-40-11

Page 1049 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

HV P/S Controller Output U1-10 5 V/Div 5 sec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1034 (U1-10) Normal Signal from the Output of the HV P/S PWM Control to the gate of Q1

Page 1050 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

HV P/S Flyback Primary Voltage TP2 50 V/Div 5 sec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1035 (TP2) Normal Flyback signal at the HV P/S Transformer Primary

34-40-11

Page 1051 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(f) The Flyback transformer secondary is shown in figure 1036 (CR1-Anode). The same rules for the primary apply to the secondary as well. figure 1037 (Flyback Current) is an example of the expected voltage developed across R13 due to Flyback Primary Current. A short circuit on the secondary will cause this signal to be much higher which in turn will activate the over-current point on the Pulse Width Modulator (U15) thus shortening the duration of the PWM output pulse. (4) In the event that a pulse is present at the Drain of Q4, and the high-voltage power supply output (measured at L9) is within the specified limits (285 to 375 Vdc), the next step is to measure and set the Magnetron Current through the Magnetron Current Loop Cutout provided on the board. This cutout, located directly below the pulse transformer (T2), is designed to accept a standard current probe from the non-component side of the board. The expected current at this point is 3 amperes peak. An adjustment is provided (R200) to set the Magnetron current to the required 3 amperes. See Figure 1038 (Magnetron Current). (a) No Detected RF Pulse or Incorrect Magnetron Current Level. 1 If the current measured through the Magnetron Current Cutout is below 1.5 Amps, suspect a relatively high impedance in the Primary of T2. A current measurement of 0 amperes, of course, would indicate an open circuit in the secondary of T2. A current measurement of 5 to 10 amperes would indicate a short circuit to ground on the secondary of T2 or a short to ground in the Magnetron. A current measurement of 4 amperes which is not adjustable by R200 but with the high-voltage power supply output within specifications (370 # 5 Vdc) would indicate a failure in the Pulse Height Regulator circuitry or the absence of R204 if it was removed earlier for troubleshooting. If R204 has been removed, confirm that TP14 is below TP1 but not below 1.5 Vdc. If so, reinstall R204 and adjust Magnetron current to 3 amperes. 5 If the current cannot be adjusted by R200 or the voltage at TP14 is out of limits, check for a Magnetron Current Sense Delay Gate at TP17. See Figure 1039 (TP17); U58-4, for proper signal.

2 3

Page 1052 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
This gate generates a delay until the middle of the Magnetron Current Pulse and triggers U58-10 which generates the Magnetron Current Sense Gate, a 1 sec wide pulse at U58-5, which enables the Magnetron Current Sample and Hold Switch (U60). See Figure 1040 (TP16). The other inputs to U60 are the conditioned Magnetron Current Pulse, the HV_ENABLE discrete, and -5 Vdc. See figure 1041 (TP20). When U60 is enabled by the Magnetron Current Sense Gate, it samples the Magnetron Current Pulse U60-3, and charges the hold capacitors C144 through R221 to the sampled level.

NOTE:

The input impedance of U61A is so high that the output should be monitored with the oscilloscope probe rather than the input to prevent loading C144. The output of U61A is expected to be a constant voltage with an amplitude equal to the input voltage during the sample time period. This signal is then buffered through U61A, and drives U61B which inverts and amplifies this control voltage for the high-voltage power supply pulse width modulator (U1-3). See Figure 1043 (TP14) U61-7. R200 is used to set the gain for U61B, and its range allows for the compensation of different Magnetrons which are used. The HV_ENABLE discrete is used as the enable for U60B. Its purpose is to set the quiescent condition for C144 to -5 Vdc and force the Magnetron Current Pulse to always start below 3 amperes and regulate up to the desired value rather than to overshoot high and regulate down to the desired level.

The Missing Pulse detector (U61C, U61D, and their associated circuitry) comprises a peak current detector which monitors the conditioned Magnetron Current (See figure 1042). If the current is between the limits of 1.5 and 3.4 amperes, the Missing Pulse detector outputs a negative going pulse. This pulse is an input to the Logic Board Microprocessor. If its absence is detected for 16 transmit cycles, the microprocessor flags the indicator with a TX_FLT.

34-40-11

Page 1053 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

HV P/S Flyback Secondary Voltage CR1 Anode 100 V/Div 5 sec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1036 (CR1 Anode) Normal Output Voltage from the HV P/S Transformer Secondary

Page 1054 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

T1 Primary Current Jct R13-Q1 Source 100 mV/Div 2 sec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1037 (Fly Current) Normal Signal Due to the Flyback Primary Current Flowing Through R13

34-40-11

Page 1055 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Magnetron Current Magnetron Current Loop Cutout 10 mV/Div 50 Ohms (1 Amp/Div 1 sec/Div Tek TM502A/A6302 Probe (1 Amp/Div) External TP8 Positive

Figure 1038 (Current Loop Magnetron Current) Typical Current as Measured Through the Current Probe Cutout

Page 1056 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Magnetron Current Sense Delay Gate TP17 2 V/Div 400 nsec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive

Figure 1039 (TP17) Magnetron Current Sense Delay Gate

34-40-11

Page 1057 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Magnetron Current Sense Gate TP16 2 V/Div 400 nsec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive

Figure 1040 (TP16) Magnetron Current Sense Gate

Page 1058 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Amplified Magnetron Current Location: TP20 Volts/Div: 1 V/Div Time/Div: 1 sec/Div Probe: X 10 Trigger: External TP8 Positive

Figure 1041 (TP20) Conditioned Magnetron Current Pulse

34-40-11

Page 1059 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Missing Pulse Detector TP15 1 V/Div 1 sec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive

Figure 1042 (TP15) The MISSING_PULSE Output Page 1060 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Pulse Height Control Voltage TP14 1 V/Div 1 sec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive

Figure 1043 (TP14) The CONTROL_VOLTS Input to the HV P/S PWM

34-40-11

Page 1061 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(5) In the event that the high-voltage power supply voltage is low, the Magnetron current cannot be adjusted up to 3 amperes, and the correct operation of the HV P/S controller as well as the correct drive signal at TP4 has been confirmed; then excessive current draw from the high voltage power supply may be suspected. One of the quickest ways to confirm this is to monitor the voltage at the Drain of Q4. See figure 1045 (CR5 Cathode) and figure 1045 (Q4 Drain Voltage/CR4 Current). (a) Monitor closely the DC offset from ground for this signal over the period of the pulse. Ascertain a relative measurement of the current flow across the RDS_ON of Q4. Normally, Q4 will pull down to less than 30 Vdc over the entire pulse. If this voltage tails upward towards the end of the pulse above 60 volts, troubleshoot for excessive current flow from the high-voltage power supply. (b) Confirm and isolate the failure by lifting R14 and CR4 from the circuit and rechecking the Magnetron Current. See figure 1044 (Jct R14-C12/R14 Current). Figure 1044 (Jct R14-C12/R14 Current) is included to show the relationship between the voltage and the current through R14 and Q7. Q7 is used to reset the core of T2 after every pulse. It can best be described as a Damper or Pulse Tail Clipper. When T2 reverses polarity after Q4 turns off, the positive ringback above the high-voltage supply turns on Q7 as well as CR4. The cathode of Q7 is held low due to a charge stored in C12. When the gate of Q7 exceeds this charge by the turn-on voltage of Q7, it discharges the energy stored in the core of T2. CR4 only turns on momentarily. Its voltage and current waveforms are shown in figure 1045 (Q4 Drain/CR4 Current). In both cases, if the current waveform differs markedly from the plots shown, it indicates a failure. (c) The current flowing in the primary of T2 can be measured by lifting L9, attaching a current probe, and reinstalling L9. The expected current is shown in figure 1046 (L9 Current). A short on the secondary would be reflected back to the primary and 90 amperes or greater may be measured at this point during a failure.

Page 1062 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(6) The following is a recommended sequence of events when troubleshooting the Motor Drive Circuitry of the ART 2000/ART 2100 Power Supply Board. It is recommended that a known good Logic Board be used for the following tests, as well as checking the Motor Windings themselves before applying power especially if the failure is related to the Azimuth or Elevation antenna drive. (a) No antenna movement in either Azimuth or Elevation upon turn-on. 1 2 3 4 Check that the Motor Drive Switch on the Logic board is in the ON position. Check that there is +26.25 Vdc (FILTERED_MOTOR_A+) is present at L6. Check that +5.2 Vdc 0.25 Vdc is present at TP10. Check for continuity from the Power Supply connector (J1-31 through J1-40) to the Logic Board connector (J2-31 through J2-40). Check the Azimuth and Elevation motor windings themselves for opens or shorts. If an open or shorted winding is found, check for a shorted Motor Driver (U33, U34, U49, U50). If a shorted Motor Driver is found, check that the FPGA is being programmed and is running by monitoring U11-80 the Done Programming pin. See figure 1047 (U11-80).

34-40-11

Page 1063 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Top Trace Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger: Q7 Cathode Voltage Q7 Cathode 100 V/Div 1 sec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive

Bottom Trace Q7 Cathode Current R14 10 mV/Div 50 Ohms (5 A/Div) 1 sec/Div Tek TM502A/A6302 (5 A/Div) External TP8 Positive

Figure 1044 (Jct R14-C12/R14 Current) Normal Current and Voltage Waveforms Expected at the Cathode of Q7

Page 1064 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Top Trace Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger: Q4 Drain Voltage CR5 Cathode 100 V/Div 1 sec/Div X 10 External TP8 Positive

Bottom Trace CR4 Current CR4 10 mV/Div 50 Ohms (1 A/Div) 1 sec/Div Tek TM502A/A6302 (1 A/Div) External TP8 Positive

Figure 1045 (Q4 Drain/CR4 Current) Normal Current and Voltage Waveforms Expected Through CR4 Page 1065 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: T2 Primary Current Location: L9 Volts/Div: 20 mV/Div 50 Ohms (10 A/Div) Time/Div: 1 sec/Div Probe: Tek AM503A/A6302 Prove (5 A/Div) Trigger: External TP8 Positive Figure 1046 (L9) Normal Current Expected Through the Primary of T2

Page 1066 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

DP (Done Programming) U11-80 1 V/Div 2 sec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1047 (U11-80) The FPGA Done Programming Pin High Upon Successful Loading of Stored ROM Program Page 1067 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Upon unit turn-on this pin should be low and after two seconds go high and remain high. Failure to do this indicates that the FPGA is not being programmed by its ROM U10. 6 Check for continuity between U10 and U11, also check for shorts between adjacent pins of the FPGA, U11. Check the operation of the FPGA clock (U11-30). See Figure 1048 (FPGA clock).

WARNING:Operation of the Power Supply board

for a period exceeding 15 minutes with the FPGA running unprogrammed will overheat the FPGA, possibly causing its failure, and may damage the mounting area.

Once it has been determined that the FPGA is being programmed and is running, the next step is to check that the FPGA has the correct output by checking the Sine, Cosine DACs. There is a sine and a cosine DAC (U13) for both the Azimuth and Elevation motors. The data input lines to these DACs come from the ROM U10, while the timing and address information comes from the FPGA. a Begin troubleshooting by confirming that U13-4 has +2.5 Vdc reference, if so, monitor U13-2 (Azimuth Current Limit Sine) and U13-1 (Azimuth Current Limit Cosine). See figure 1049 (Azimuth Current Limit Sine) and figure 1050 (Azimuth Current Limit Cosine). These points set the maximum current limit for the Motor Drivers. The Motor Driver Current is compared to this voltage in U12. The expected waveform at these points is a rectified sinewave. The output from U12, in turn, is used by the FPGA to control the on-time of the Motor Drivers. A non-sinusoidal waveform at any of the DAC outputs can be caused by one or more of the data lines being open from the ROM U10. b The lack of a rectified sinusoid can be caused by one or more open address lines or an open between the FPGA (U11) and the Logic Board connector (J1-31 through J1-40 and J1-1 through J1-4).

Page 1068 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
8 Next switch the Indicator to VP mode and check the output of U13-20 (see figure 1051 - Elevation Current Limit Sine) and U13-19 (See figure 1052 - Elevation Current Limit Cosine). A correct waveform from these pins indicates that the FPGA is being loaded with and is running the correct program. A problem with one or more of these waveforms indicates a problem on the BUSS between the FPGA and the DAC or between the Power Supply Board and the Logic Board. 9 Next, monitor the output from the Motor Drivers themselves. The current flowing from Azimuth Current Sense (Sine) develops a voltage across their respective sense resistors. Refer to figure 1053 (U34-10 and the Azimuth Current Sense (Cosine) figure 1054 (U33-10). Likewise, in VP mode, Elevation current Sense (Sine) and Elevation Current Sense (Cosine develop a voltage across their respective sense resistors. Refer to figure 1055 (U5010) and figure 1056 (U49-10). The voltage developed across the Current Sense resistor is analogous to 1.1 amps per volt. This voltage is used as one input to the Quad reset comparator, U12. For each comparator the appropriate Current Limit output from the DAC is paired with its appropriate Motor Driver Current Sense output, refer to figures 1057 - 1060. The output from the comparator is used to terminate the FPGA output to that Motor Driver thus maintaining motor current and generating a quasi-sinewave drive for the antenna. The absence of an output at pin 10 of the Motor Drivers could indicate an open winding, an open sense resistor, or lack of a drive signal from the FPGA. Check pins 11, 7, and 5 of the Motor Drivers for the presence of a drive signal from the FPGA. There will be no signal present on U49 or U50 unless in VP mode, conversely no drive signals will be present on U33 or U34 during VP mode. A continuous high drive signal to one or more of the Motor drivers will in all likelihood cause its failure as well as the motor winding(s) it drives.

34-40-11

Page 1069 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

FPGA Clock U11-30 2 V/Div 400 nsec/Div X 10 Internal Positive Figure 1048 (U11-30) 1.025 MHz FPGA Clock

Page 1070 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

V Out A (Azimuth Current Limit Sine) U13-2 200 mV/Div 2 msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive Figure 1049 (U13-2) Azimuth Current Limit Sine

34-40-11

Page 1071 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

V Out B (Azimuth Current Limit Cosine) U13-1 200 mV/Div 2 msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive Figure 1050 (U13-1) Azimuth Current Limit Cosine

Page 1072 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

V Out C (Elevation Current Limit Sine - VP) U13-20 200 mV/Div 2 msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive Figure 1051 (U13-20 VP Mode) Elevation Current Limit Sine

34-40-11

Page 1073 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

V Out D (Elevation Current Limit Cosine - VP) U13-19 (VP) 200 mV/Div 2 msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1052 (U13-19) Elevation Current Limit Cosine (VP Mode)

Page 1074 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Azimuth Current Sense (Sine) U34-10 500 mV/Div 2 msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1053 U34-10 Azimuth Current Sense Sine

34-40-11

Page 1075 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Azimuth Current Sense (Cosine) U33-10 500 mV/Div 2 msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1054 (U33-10) Azimuth Current Sense Cosine Page 1076 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Elevation Current Sense (Sine) U50-10 500 mV/Div 2 msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1055 (U50-10) Elevation Current Sense Sine (VP Mode)

34-40-11

Page 1077 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Elevation Current Sense (Cosine) U49-10 500 mV/Div 2 msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1056 (U49-10) Elevation Current Sense Cosine (VP Mode)

Page 1078 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Azimuth Current Reset (Sine) U12-2 1 V/Div 2 msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive Figure 1057 (U12-2) Azimuth Current Reset (Sine)

34-40-11

Page 1079 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Azimuth Current Reset (Cosine) U12-1 1 V/Div 20 msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1058 (U12-1) Azimuth Current Reset (Cosine)

Page 1080 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Elevation Current Reset (Sine) U12-14 1 V/Div 2- msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1059 (U12-14 VP Mode) Elevation Current Reset (Sine)

34-40-11

Page 1081 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Signal: Location: Volts/Div: Time/Div: Probe: Trigger:

Elevation Current Reset (Cosine) U12-13 1 V/Div 20 msec/Div X 10 Internal Positive

Figure 1060 (U12-13) Elevation Current Reset (Cosine)

Page 1082 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
5. Alignment Procedures A. General The alignment of the ART 2000 consists of the alignment of the magnetron, video if and receiver. Alignment of the ART 2000 must be performed with all circuit modules and dummy load in place. All voltage readings at test points are referenced to ground unless otherwise stated.

WARNING: OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT INVOLVES THE USE OF HIGH

VOLTAGES. THE TECHNICIAN OR OPERATOR SHOULD OBSERVE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING ANY TESTS OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION. SITIVE (ESDS) DEVICES. UNIT MODULES AND INDIVIDUAL ESDS DEVICES MUST BE HANDLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIAL ESDS HANDLING PROCEDURES. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO ESDS DEVICES.

CAUTION: THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SEN-

(1)

Test Equipment Refer to section 9001 - Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment.

(2)

Environmental Conditions Alignment shall be performed under ambient conditions with temperature of 25 5 C except where Receiver Calibration requires alignment at -55, -30, -5, +20, +45, and +70.

B.

Pre-alignment Set-up Procedures (1) Before applying power to the unit, set the bench tester/ harness to the following parameters. (a) (b) (c) (d) Set the power supply to 27.5 V dc. Set S1 on the bench tester/harness for RT ON/OFF #1. Set S2 on the bench tester/harness for ARINC 429 control bus #1 operation. Set S4 on the bench tester/harness to the open position.

34-40-11

Page 1083 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
C. Magnetron Current Set (1) (2) (3) Remove cover and fold logic board down. Install a cross-coupler and load at the antenna port. Insert current probe in cutout port on the power supply board.

NOTE:
(4) (5)

The wave-form will be inverted if the probe is used from the component side of the board.

Turn the unit on and wait for the one (1) minute warmup period. Adjust R4200 for a peak current of 3.0 # 0.5 Amps.

NOTE:

The peak spectrum is above for best

current should be adjusted for best and power output. If the power output 3.0 kW, then adjust the peak current spectrum.

Spectrum:

Only one primary peak. Symmetrical first side lobes (within 2 dB of each other). First side lobes at least 6 dB down. Tune the peak current to try and get the first sidelobes as close in amplitude as possible and still keep both of them as far down as possible from the primary peak.

(6) (7) (8) (9) D. (1) (2)

Select a value for L4009 that provides the least slope of the detected pulse. Voltage at TP4003 will be in the range of 270 to 340 Vdc. Allow the unit to run ten (10) minutes and verify the settings. Verify the correct power output. Install the IF compartment cover. Place the unit in TEST or STBY Mode. This will cause the STC/AGC and the Man_Gain to be fixed at 7 volts. (a) Using a coax, apply a signal from the Radar Signal Generator to the IF. This coax must provide a dc block form the IF to the Radar Signal Generator. The following procedure must be performed with the IF cover installed. Set the Radar Signal Generator to the following: Mode: CW Frequency: 59 MHz Power Out Level: -20 dBm (c) Adjust L5524 for 2.38 # 0.05 Vdc at TP5018.

59 MHz IF ALIGNMENT

(b)

Page 1084 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(d) Set the Radar Signal Generator to the following: Mode: CW Frequency: 59 MHz Power Out Level: -60 dBm (e) (f) (g) Tune L5501, L5502, T5501, and T5502 for peak at TP5023. Adjust the signal input level to maintain 3.0 0.5 Vdc. Sweep the input signal from 58 to 60 MHz and adjust L5501 and L5502 for the best bandpass symmetry and minimum ripple as viewed with an oscilloscope at TP5023. Verify that the half-voltage bandwidth is 900 200 kHz and that the half-voltage symmetry is about 59.0 0.1 MHz

(h)

E.

RECEIVER CALIBRATION

NOTE: If the Logic Board or Receiver Assembly are replaced, the

ART 2000 will need a complete temperature range calibration. Tested temperatures are: -55, -30,-5,+20, +45, and +70. This will require the use of a calibrated temperature chamber-IE: Thermotron or Similar. If a calibrated temperature chamber is not available, the ART 2000 will need to be returned to :Honeywell Repair and Overhaul 23500 W 105th St. Olathe Kansas, 66061 Receiver calibration includes AFC, AGC, STC, MAN_GAIN and detector profiling in the following procedure. The following must be done before calibration: (a) (b) (c) Toggle RCVR CAL ENABLE (SW5001-8) to the ON position. Stabilization must be OFF during receiver calibration. Turn MOTORS OFF with SCAN DISABLE (S5001-2).

(1)

NOTE:

When calibrating the receiver in ambient conditions (+25 degrees C), the default values will be loaded into all other temperature zones if SW5001-3 is in the OFF position. IF SW5001-3 is in the ON position, then the default values will not be loaded.

34-40-11

Page 1085 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
F. AFC CALIBRATION (Must have S/W > 0103). (1) Radar Signal Generator Settings: TARGET RANGE TARGET LEVEL TARGET WIDTH (2) (3) (4) - 100 NM - OFF or -120 dBm (minimum signal input) - 130 NM

Ground AFC_CAL (J5001-16). Wait until CAL_LIGHT (J5001-38) goes high. Set the TARGET LEVEL to -85 dBm.

NOTE:
(5) (6) (7) (8)

If AGC cal does not lock, repeat cal using -75 dBm.

Momentarily ground CAL_INC (J5001-15). CAL_LIGHT (J5001-38) will go high in approximately 15 seconds. Remove ground from AFC_CAL (J5001-16). Measure the AFC Offset to see if calibration is in tolerance. If calibration is out of tolerance, then repeat steps (1) through (7). If the unit fails to pass after several tries, then the unit may require repair or IF filter re-alignment.

G.

DETECTOR CALIBRATION (Must have S/W > 0103) (1) Radar Signal Generator Settings: TARGET RANGE TARGET LEVEL TARGET WIDTH (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) 100 NM -115 dBm 130 NM

Ground DET_CAL (J5001-14). Momentarily ground CAL_INC (J5001-15) and wait until CAL_LIGHT (J5001-38) goes high. Increment Radar Signal Generators TARGET LEVEL by 1 dB. Momentarily ground CAL_INC (J5001-15). CAL_LIGHT (J5001-38) will go low.

Wait until the CAL_LIGHT (J5001-38) goes high and then repeat steps 3, 4, 5, and 6, 40 times. CAL_LIGHT (J5001-38) will FLASH after 40 times.

Page 1086 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(9) Set the TARGET LEVEL to minimum signal input (OFF or 120 dBm).

(10) Momentarily ground CAL_INC (J5001-15) and wait for CAL_LIGHT (J5001-38) to FLASH. (11) Set the TARGET LEVEL to -110 dBm (MDS) and then momentarily ground CAL_INC (J5001-15). (12) The CAL_LIGHT (J5001-38) will stay ON. (13) Remove the ground from DET_CAL (J5001-14). (14) Now test MDS, STC, and Manual Gain to determine if the calibration was successful. If not, the repeat steps (1) through (13).

NOTE:

Sensitivity Time Control (STC) Levels Set the indicator to 40 nm WX mode and verify the 30% color levels 3 dB of the following table.

Antenna Size (in) 12 12 12 12 12

Display Tange (NM) 40 40 40 40 40

Target Distance (NM) 10 10 10 10 20

Target Width (uS) 35 35 35 35 35

ART 2000 Level (dBm) -97 -88 -80 -76 -86

Color Level (30%) GREEN YELLOW RED MAGENTA RED

Table 1003 Calibration Table NOTE:


If the calibration was not successful, then the following guidelines may be helpful. - if at +70 deg C, then start at -112 dBm. - if at -55 deg C, then start at -118 dBm. (15) Toggle RCVR CAL ENABLE (16) Turn MOTORS ON 6. Retest Procedure After a fault has been isolated and repaired, the unit should be subjected to the functional test in the "Testing" section of this manual to ensure that the repaired area is operating correctly and that other areas have not been damaged during the repair procedure. (SW5001-8) to the OFF position.

with SCAN DISABLE (S5001-2).

34-40-11

Page 1087 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
7. Service Information A. Proper Test Equipment Usage Failure of semiconductor devices and integrated circuits by accidental application of excessive voltage or current is reduced with proper test equipment usage. (1) Do not use multimeters with sensitivities less than 5000-ohms-per-volt. Use at least a 20,000-ohms-per-volt multimeter or a vacuum tube voltmeter. (2) Do not use test equipment with transformerless power supplies unless an isolation transformer is used in the ac power line. (3) Use a conductive table top for testing and connect the table top to the ground conductor of the 60Hz power line. (4) Test equipment with a line filter across the ac input can accidentally apply 55 Vac to semiconductor devices. Always connect a ground wire from the test equipment chassis to the chassis of the unit-under-test before making any other connections. (5) All low impedance equipment (such as pulse generators, etc.) should be disconnected before dc power supplies are turned off. Capacitor Testing (1) Check all capacitors with proper voltage polarity. Polarized capacitors are damaged by reverse voltage and should be replaced if that occurs. (2) Check all capacitors with proper voltage level. A capacitor may be damaged if the voltage applied exceeds the dc working voltage of that capacitor. (3) When checking tantalum capacitors, use a series resistor to limit the charge and discharge rates to prevent surge damage to the capacitor. The value of the series resistor should be 10 ohms for each volt applied to the capacitor. Transistor Testing

B.

C.

CAUTION: BEFORE INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT TRANSISTOR, MAKE

CERTAIN THAT OTHER ELEMENTS OF THE CIRCUIT ARE IN GOOD OPERATING ORDER. IF A DEFECT EXISTS IN THE CIRCUIT, THE REPLACEMENT TRANSISTOR MAY ALSO FAIL.

Tables 1004 and 1005 provide typical testing data for PNP and NPN transistors. Connect the ohmmeter per polarity indicated by base, collector and emitter columns of the tables.

Page 1088 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

CHECK NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Connect base to collector 8 Connect base to emitter

BASE +

COLLECTOR

EMITTER + + -

RANGE

RELATIVE RESISTANCE

+ + -

RX100 or Low (1,000 ohms or less) RX1,000 RX10,000 High (100,000 ohms or more) RX10,000 High (100,000 ohms or more) RX10,000 High (100,000 ohms or more) RX100 or Low (1,000 ohms or less) RX1,000 RX10,000 High (100,000 ohms or more) RX100 or Resistance should decrease RX1,000 from that obtained in check 3. RX10,000 High (100,000 ohms or more)

Table 1004 PNP Transistor Testing Procedure

CHECK NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Connect base to collector 8 Connect base to emitter

BASE + -

COLLECTOR

EMITTER RANGE + RX100 or RX1,000

RELATIVE RESISTANCE Low (1,000 ohms or less)

RX10,000 High (100,000 ohms or more) RX10,000 High (100,000 ohms or more) RX10,000 High (100,000 ohms or more) RX100 or RX1,000 Low (1,000 ohms or less)

+ + + +

RX10,000 High (100,000 ohms or more) RX100 or RX1,000 Resistance should decrease from that obtained in check 3.

RX10,000 High (100,000 ohms or more)

Table 1005 NPN Transistor Testing Procedure

34-40-11

Page 1089 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
D. Integrated Circuit Testing

CAUTION: BEFORE INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT IC, VERIFY THERE IS

NO VOLTAGE 10% GREATER THAN +Vcc OR -Vcc ON ANY OF THE IC HOLES ON THE BOARD. VERIFY THERE IS NO GROUND ON ANY IC HOLE THAT SHOULD NOT BE GROUNDED.

CAUTION: BEFORE INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT IC, MAKE CERTAIN

THAT OTHER ELEMENTS OF THE CIRCUIT ARE IN GOOD OPERATING ORDER. IF A DEFECT EXISTS IN THE CIRCUIT, THE REPLACEMENT IC MAY ALSO FAIL.

(1)

Common digital IC failures are listed in following table.

SYMPTOM Constant LO Constant HI Approx. 1.5 Vdc Output cannot go LO Output cannot go HI Output cannot change

POSSIBLE CAUSE Input(s) or output shorted to ground pin of IC. Input(s) or output shorted to Vcc pin of IC. Open input(s) or output. Ground pin open. Vcc pin open. Inputs shorted together.

Table 1006 Common IC Failures


(2) Series 54/74 Integrated Circuits Type-number identification is becoming increasingly complex for the 54/74 series of integrated circuits. These chips were originally referred to as TTL; however, many different type numbers now apply to chips that perform the same logical function, although specifications (temperature, speed, power, etc.) and interior configurations may be different. Usually, the only difference in the type numbers involves the alpha characters immediately following the 54/74 designation. Refer to table 1006 as a guideline in determining the specific specifications of each type. Most chips are available in both 54 series and 74 series type numbers. The 54 series have an operating tempera-

Page 1090 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
ture specification of -55 C to 125 C, and the 74 series have a temperature specification of 0 C to 70 C. ALPHA CHARACTER NONE S SIGNIFICANCE Standard Transistor-Transistor-Logic (TTL) Schottky-clamped TTL device. Contains the integrated Schottky-Barrier diode-clamped transistor circuitry. Low-power Schottky TTL device. Advanced Schottky TTL device. Advanced Low-power Schottky TTL device. High-speed CMOS device. dling. Requires special ESDS han-

LS AS ALS HC HCT AC ACT

High-speed CMOS with TTL input voltage level compatibility. Requires special ESDS handling. Advanced CMOS device. dling. Requires special ESDS hanRe-

Advanced CMOS with input TTL compatibility. quires special ESDS handling.

Table 1007 54/74 Series IC Alpha Character Significance


(3) Integrated Circuit Functional Diagrams The truth table of a logic element is a primary fault isolation tool. A HI level on all digital logic elements used in the unit is between +2 Vdc and +5 Vdc in TTL circuits and +3.5 Vdc to +5 Vdc in CMOS circuits. A LO level is less than +0.8 Vdc in TTL and +1.5 Vdc in CMOS circuits. When checking input and output levels of a logic element under question it should be remembered that an input or output may not agree with its truth table, not because it has malfunctioned, but because some other component connected to the same point has shorted to ground or to (Vcc). This is not uncommon when an output of one element is connected to an input of another. It may be necessary to isolate the gate under question by unsoldering the necessary IC pins. The following table is an index to figure 1061 which contains descriptions of certain integrated circuits as an aid to understanding the operation of this equipment. Only more complex or uncommon integrated circuits are included in this section as information on basic logic elements, operational amplifiers, and other simple circuits are readily available from publications such as general IC data books or basic electronic theory.

34-40-11

Page 1091 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Honeywell PART NUMBER 120-02213-0002 120-02363-0009 120-02452-0000 120-02494-0000 120-03285-0002 120-03475-0003 120-03488-0000 120-03520-0000 120-03569-0000 120-03592-0000 120-03598-0000 120-06065-0002 120-08030-0002

SHEET NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

TYPE NUMBER Z84C00 6206BNJC35 MAX699EWE X20C16JI-55 CA3306CM C0820 PM7224FS MC3423D L6203 AD7226KR HI9P-5700A-9 AD7533KR N/A

DESCRIPTION MICROPROCESSOR 32X8 STATIC RAM WATCHDOG CONTROLLER 2KX8 NOVRAM A/D CONVERTER 8 BIT A/D DAC OVERVOLTAGE SENSOR FULL BRIDGE DRIVER QUAD 8-BIT DAC FLASH 8-BIT A/D 10-BIT DAC 429 TRANSCEIVER

Table 1008 Index to Integrated Circuit Diagrams

Page 1092 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 1 of 13)

34-40-11

Page 1093 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 2 of 13) Page 1094 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 3 of 13)

34-40-11

Page 1095 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 4 of 13)

Page 1096 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 5 of 13) Page 1097 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 6 of 13)

Page 1098 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 7 of 13) Page 1099 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 8 of 13)

Page 1100 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 9 of 13) Page 1101 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 10 of 13)

Page 1102 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 11 of 13) Page 1103 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 12 of 13) Page 1104 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Figure 1061 Integrated Circuit Diagrams (Sheet 13 of 13)

34-40-11

Page 1105 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

34-40-11

Page 1106 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 1. General This section contains a summary of changes for both the top assembly and subsequent sub-assemblies, an assembly drawing for parts and test point locations, and a schematic diagram for each circuit card assembly. Mechanical sub-assemblies without a corresponding schematic are not included in this section. Also included are pin function diagrams, the outline drawing, and top assembly drawing. A. Test Points Test points, where applicable, can be located on the assembly drawing preceding each schematic. B. Summary of Unit Changes The "Summary of Unit Changes" page lists unit and subassembly revisions and related commentary for each revision of the manual. C. Summary of Changes and Schematic Diagrams The "Summary of Changes" page lists revision changes to a particular subassembly by Component Maintenance Manual revision number. Detailed descriptions of changes are listed as applicable. An assembly (board layout) page and schematic diagram for each electronic subassembly are placed behind the "Summary of Changes" page. Component Maintenance Manual revision number arrows mark schematic changes listed on the "Summary of Changes" page.

34-40-11

Page 2001 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Page 2002 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

SUMMARY OF UNIT CHANGES PART NUMBER 071-01519-XXXX


MANUAL REVISION ASSEMBLY/ MODULE (CCA) REVISION COMMENTS

34-40-11

Page 2003 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

SUMMARY OF UNIT CHANGES PART NUMBER 071-01519-XXXX (cont.)


MANUAL REVISION ASSEMBLY/ MODULE (CCA) REVISION COMMENTS

Page 2004 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

P5001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

I/O I I I I I I I I I

SIGNAL NAME STRUT SWITCH IN CONTROL 1 429 RECEIVER A CONTROL 1 429 RECEIVER B CONTROL 2 429 RECEIVER A CONTROL 2 429 RECEIVER B CONTROL 3 429 RECEIVER A CONTROL 3 429 RECEIVER B ARINC 429 STABILIZATION (A) ARINC 429 STABILIZATION (B) NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION

O O

TIME/TEMP OUT (A) (MAINTENANCE

ONLY)

TIME/TEMP OUT (B) (MAINTENANCE ONLY) DETECTOR CAL (MAINTENANCE ONLY) CALIBRATION INC (MAINTENANCE ONLY) AFC ADJUST (MAINTENANCE ONLY) NO CONNECTION

I I I I

PITCH STABILIZATION LO PITCH STABILIZATION HI ROLL STABILIZATION LO ROLL STABILIZATION HI NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION

Table 2001 ART 2000 Connector Pin Function Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)

34-40-11

Page 2005 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

P5001 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

I/O

SIGNAL NAME NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION

I I I I I

RT #1 ON/OFF (ON=GND) RT #2 ON/OFF (ON=GND) RT #3 ON/OFF (ON=GND) +28 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER +28 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER POWER AND CHASSIS GROUND POWER AND CHASSIS GROUND CALIBRATION LIGHT (MAINTENANCE ONLY) SPARE

GYRO REFERENCE HI GYRO REFERENCE COMMON

O O O O O O O I

ARINC 453 DATA (A) ARINC 453 DATA (B) +5 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE VOLTAGE CONFIGURATION MODULE CLOCK CONFIGURATION MODULE CHIP SELECT 1 CONFIGURATION MODULE CHIP SELECT 2 DATA TO CONFIGURATION MODULE DATA FROM CONFIGURATION MODULE CONFIGURATION MODULE GROUND

Table 2001 ART 2000 Connector Pin Function Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) Page 2006 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

155-05816-0000 R-AA

ART 2000 Outline Drawing Figure 1062 (sheet 1 of 2)

34-40-11

Page 2007 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

155-05816-0000 R-AA

ART 2000 Outline Drawing Figure 1062 (Sheet 2 OF 2)

34-40-11

Page 2009 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08549-0000 R-10

Logic Board Figure 1063 (Sheet 1 OF 4)

34-40-11

Page 2011 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08549-0000 R-10

Logic Board Figure 1063 (Sheet 2 OF 4)

34-40-11

Page 2013 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08549-0000 R-10

Logic Board Figure 1063 (Sheet 3 OF 4)

34-40-11

Page 2015 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08549-0000 R-10

Logic Board Figure 1063 (Sheet 4 OF 4)

34-40-11

Page 2017 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 1 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2019 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 2 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2021 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 3 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2023 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 4 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2025 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 5 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2027 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 6 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2029 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 8 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2033 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 9 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2035 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 10 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2037 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 11 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2039 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 12 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2041 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 13 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2043 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 14 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2045 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 15 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2047 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08549-0000 R-11

Logic Board Schematic Figure 1064 (Sheet 16 OF 16)

34-40-11

Page 2049 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08545-0000 R-2

Preamp Board Figure 1065

34-40-11

Page 2051 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

002-08545-0000 R-0

Preamp Board Schematic Figure 1066

34-40-11

Page 2053 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08548-0000 R-16

Power Supply/Modulator Board Figure 1067 (Sheet 1 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 2055 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08548-0000 R-16

Power Supply/Modulator Board Figure 1067 (Sheet 2 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 2057 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08548-0000 R-16

Power Supply/Modulator Board Figure 1067 (Sheet 3 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 2059 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08548-0000 R-16

Power Supply/Modulator Board Figure 1067 (Sheet 4 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 2061 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Power Supply/Modulator Board Schematic 002-08548-0000 R-16 Figure 1068 (Sheet 1 of 7)

34-40-11

Page 2063 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Power Supply/Modulator Board Schematic 002-08548-0000 R-16 Figure 1068 (Sheet 2 of 7)

34-40-11

Page 2065 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Power Supply/Modulator Board Schematic 002-08548-0000 R-16 Figure 1068 (Sheet 3 of 7)

34-40-11

Page 2067 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Power Supply/Modulator Board Schematic 002-08548-0000 R-16 Figure 1068 (Sheet 4 of 7)

34-40-11

Page 2069 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Power Supply/Modulator Board Schematic 002-08548-0000 R-16 Figure 1068 (Sheet 5 of 7)

34-40-11

Page 2071 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Power Supply/Modulator Board Schematic 002-08548-0000 R-16 Figure 1068 (Sheet 6 of 7)

34-40-11

Page 2073 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Power Supply/Modulator Board Schematic 002-08548-0000 R-16 Figure 1068 (Sheet 7 of 7)

34-40-11

Page 2075 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
DISASSEMBLY 1. General This section contains information for disassembly of the unit. Disassembly procedures are to be accomplished only when repairs or modifications are required, and only to the extent that is required by the repair, or as described in the modification service bulletin. This section contains the recommended procedures for removal of all subassemblies. Refer to the Illustrated Parts List (IPL) for aid in disassembly. Part numbers are used in the IPL drawings to identify specific parts. Complete disassembly should never be undertaken. Provisions have been made in the design of the unit to make complete disassembly unnecessary except to replace a damaged mechanical part that cannot be reached otherwise.

WARNING: REMOVE ALL POWER FROM THE UNIT BEFORE DISASSEMBLY OF ANY
MODULE. BESIDES BEING DANGEROUS TO LIFE, VOLTAGE TRANSIENTS CAN CAUSE CONSIDERABLE DAMGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.

CAUTION: EXERCISE EXTREME CARE WHEN DISCONNECTING AND RECONNECTING

THE MULTIPLE PIN CONNECTORS TO ENSURE THAT THE CONNECT ARE NOT DAMAGED BY MISALIGNMENT OF THE PINS.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO ESDS DEVICES, REFER TO PARAGRAPH 2.B.

IN THE REPAIR SECTION BEFORE HANDLING MOS AND CMOS DEVICES.

2.

Recommended Disassembly Procedures A. Bottom Cover Removal (1) (2) (3) B. Remove the nine screws (089-06008-0007) from the cover (047-09968-0001). Remove the two screws (089-06008-0004) on either side of the connector. Remove the cover from the unit.

Logic Board Removal (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Remove cover as described in paragraph 2.A. Remove the screw (089-05903-0004) located toward the center of the logic board (200-08549-0000). Remove the two screws (089-05878-0004) which fasten the connector to the base (073-00925-0002). Remove the if cover (047-10021-0001). Make note of all cable connections for re-assembly. Disconnect all cables.

34-40-11

Page 3001 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

C.

Power Supply Board Removal (1) (2) (3) (4) Remove cover as described in paragraph 2.A. Remove logic board as described in paragraph 2.B. Remove the three screws (089-05903-0004) fastening the heatsink (047-10675-0001) to the base (073-00925-0002). Remove the four board screws (089-05903-0004) and the four standoffs ( two 076-02868-0000 and two 076-028680001). Refer to the decal on the bottom cover to identify the screws to be removed. Make note of all cable connections and routing for reassembly. Disconnect all cables. Remove the power supply board (200-08540-0000) from the assembly.

(5) (6)

NOTE:

If the high voltage transformer is to be replaced, cut the magnetron cable at the center of the splice.

D.

Receiver Module Removal (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Remove cover as described in paragraph 2.A. Remove logic board as described in paragraph 2.B. Remove power supply board as described in paragraph 2.C. Tilt the gimbal assembly (200-05175-0000) to the side with the tilt motor (200-05173-0000) up. Remove the four cap screws (089-06494-0028) which fasten the receiver module (200-05553-0000) and limiter (01500239-0001) to the rf network (015-00250-0000). Separate the receiver module from the assembly and remove the limiter. Remove the three screws (089-05874-0004) securing the cover (047-10124-0001) enclosing the cable ferrules. Separate the cable ferrules from the assembly.

(6) (7) (8) E.

Preamp Board Removal (1) (2) (3) Remove the receiver module as described in paragraph 2.D.(1-6). Remove the three cover screws (089-05874-0003). Remove the cover (047-09953-0001).

Page 3002 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(4) (5) (6) (7) Disconnect P1002. De-solder E1, E2, E3 and E4. Remove the three standoffs (two 076-02825-0000 and one 076-02825-0001). Remove the preamp module from the assembly.

F.

Magnetron Removal

NOTE:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Never use tools containing ferrous metal when working with the magnetron. Remove cover as described in paragraph 2.A.

Remove logic board as described in paragraph 2.B. Remove power supply board as described in paragraph 2.C. Remove the receiver module as described in paragraph 2.D. Using a beryllium copper Allen wrench, remove the four cap screws (089-06494-0005) which fasten the magnetron (200-05310-0000) to the rf network (015-00250-0000). Remove the three screws (089-05874-0004) securing the cover (047-10124-0001) enclosing the cable ferrules. Separate the cable ferrules from the assembly.

(6) (7)

G.

Scan Motor Removal (1) (2) (3) (4) Remove cover as described in paragraph 2.A. Remove logic board as described in paragraph 2.B. Remove power supply board as described in paragraph 2.C. Remove the azimuth pivot nut (089-02344-0003), azimuth pivot (076-02278-0001) and washers (076-02876-0001 and 088-03164-0000) which secure the gimbal assembly (20005175-0000) to the bottom pivot bracket (073-009360002). Remove the four cap screws (089-06494-0018) which secure the bottom pivot bracket to the base (073-00925-0002). Separate the pivot bracket and motor assembly from the base. Remove the four screws (089-05878-0004) securing the scan motor (200-05173-0000) to the bracket. Detach the ground lug (008-00073-0000). Remove the screw (08905878-0004) which secures the cable to the base.

(5)

(6)

34-40-11

Page 3003 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
H. Tilt Motor Removal (1) (2) (3) (4) Remove cover as described in paragraph 2.A. Remove logic board as described in paragraph 2.B. Remove power supply board as described in paragraph 2.C. Remove the four screws (089-05878-0006) securing the mounting plate (047-09947-0001) to the tilt sensor assembly (200-05554-0000). Remove the four screws (089-05878-0005) securing the tilt motor (200-05173-0000) to the mounting plate. Detach the ground lug (008-00073-0000). Remove the screw (089-05878-0004) which secures the cable to the base.

(5)

(6)

Page 3004 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

CLEANING
1. General This section contains procedures for cleaning the component parts and subassemblies of the unit.

WARNING: GOGGLES MUST BE WORN WHEN USING PRESSURIZED AIR TO BLOW


DUST AND DIRT FROM EQUIPMENT. All PERSONNEL SHOULD BE CLEARED FROM THE IMMEDIATE AREA.

WARNING: USE A VENTILATED HOOD WHEN USING A CLEANING SOLVENT. AVOID

BREATHING SOLVENT VAPOR AND FUMES. AVOID CONTINUOUS CONTACT WITH CLEANING SOLVENT. WEAR A SUITABLE MASK, GOGGLES, GLOVES, AND AN APRON WHEN NECESSARY. CHANGE CLOTHING UPON WHICH SOLVENTS HAVE BEEN SPILLED. FLAMMABLE MATERIALS IN A HOOD PROVIDED WITH EXPLOSIONPROOF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND AN EXHAUST FAN WITH SPARKPROOF BLADES.

WARNING: OBSERVE ALL FIRE PRECAUTIONS FOR FLAMMABLE MATERIALS. USE

2.

Recommended Cleaning Agents Table 4001 lists the recommended clenaing agents to be used durign overhaul of the unit.

NOTE: TYPE

Equivalent substitutes may be used for listing cleaning agents.

USED TO CLEAN Various, exterior and interior Various, interior Various Various Various Nylon, Rubber Grommets

Denatured Alcohol Dupont Vertrel SMT Kimwipes lint-free tissue (Kimberly Clark Corp.) Cloth, lint-free cotton Brush, round with fiber bristles Dishwashing liquid (mild) Table 4001
3.

Brush, flat with fiber bristles Various

Recommended Cleaning Agents

Recommended Cleaning Procedures A. Exterior

34-40-11

Page 4001 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(1) (2) Wipe dust cover and front panel with a lint-free cloth dampened with denatured alcohol. For cleaning connectors, use the following procedure.

CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW SOLVENT TO RUN INTO SLEEVES OR

CONDUIT THAT COVERS WIRES CONNECTED TO INSERT TERMINALS.

(a)

Wipe dust and dirt from bodies, shells, and cable clamps using a lint-free cloth moistened with denatured alcohol. Wipe parts dry with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth. Remove dirt and lubricant from connector inserts, insulation, and terminals using a small soft bristled brush moistened with denatured alcohol. Dry the inserts with an air jet.

(b) (c)

(d) B. Interior

The following solvents are no longer recommended for benchtop or rework cleaning of printed circuit boards, modules or subassemblies.

Freon TF, IMC Trichlorothane Prelete (CFC-113) Carbon Tetrachloride Chloroform Trichloroethylene Detergents (All and equivalents)

Propyl Alcohol Methyl Alcohol Ethyl Alcohol Butyl Alcohol Methylene Chloride Xylene Genesolv 2004/2010

Table 4002 Unsafe Solvents CAUTION: DO NOT USE SOLVENT TO CLEAN PARTS COMPOSED OF OR CONTAINING NYLON OR RUBBER GROMMETS. CLEAN THESE ITEMS WITH MILD LIQUID DISHWASHING DETERGENT AND WATER. USE DETERGENT FOR THIS PURPOSE ONLY.

CAUTION: DUPONT VERTREL SMT DOES HAVE GENERAL MATERIAL COM-

PATIBILITY PROBLEMS WITH POLYCARBONATE, POLYSTYRENE, AND RUBBER. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THESE MATERIALS BE CLEANED WITH DENATURED ALCOHOL. IN ANY OF THE ADJUSTMENT SCREW CREVICES AND THEREBY SOFTEN OR DISSOLVE THE ADJUSTMENT SCREW EPOXY SEALANT. ICATE PARTS BY HOLDING THE AIR JET NOZZLE TOO CLOSE. USE BRUSHES CAREFULLY ON DELICATE PARTS.

CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW EXCESS CLEANING SOLVENT TO ACCUMULATE

CAUTION: AVOID AIR-BLASTING SMALL TUNING COILS AND OTHER DEL-

Page 4002 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 CAUTION: IMPROPER CLEANING CAN RESULT IN SURFACE LEAKAGE AND

CONDUCTIVE PARTICULATES, SUCH AS SOLDER BALLS OR METALLIC CHIPS, WHICH CAN CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHORTS. SEVERE IONIC CONTAMINATION FROM HANDLING AND FROM ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS CAN RESULT IN HIGH RESISTANCE OR OPEN CIRCUITS. SHOULD GENERALLY BE AVOIDED.

CAUTION: ULTRASONIC CLEANING CAN DAMAGE CERTAIN PARTS AND NOTE:


Solvents may be physically applied in several ways including agitation, spraying, brushing, and vapor degreasing. The cleaning solvents and methods used shall have no deleterious effect on the parts, connections, and materials being used. If sensitive components are being used, spray is recommended. Uniformity of solvent spray flow should be maximized and wait-time between soldering and cleaning should be minimized. Clean miscellaneous metal parts i.e. fasteners, handles, mounting hardware, etc. with a suitable cleaning machine. Then remove any foreign mat-

NOTE:

Remove each module subassembly. ter from the casting. (1)

Casting covers and shields should be cleaned as follows: (a) (b) (c) Remove surface grease with a lint-free cloth. Blow dust from surfaces, holes, and recesses using an air stream. If necessary, use a solvent and scrub until clean, working over all surfaces and into all holes and recesses with a suitable non-metallic brush. Position the part to dry so that solvent is not trapped in holes or recesses. Use an air stream to blow out any trapped solvent. When thoroughly clean, touch up any minor damage to the finish.

(d)

(e) (2)

Modules (circuit card assemblies) containing resistors, capacitors, rf coils, inductors, transformers, and other wired parts should be cleaned as follows: (a) Remove dust and dirt from all surfaces, including all parts and wiring, using soft-bristled brushes in conjunction with an air stream. Any dirt that cannot be removed in this way should be removed with a brush (not synthetic) saturated with an approved solvent listed above. Use of a

(b)

34-40-11

Page 4003 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
clean, dry, compressed air stream (25 to 28 psi) is recommended to remove any excess solvent. (c) (3) Remove flux residue, metallic chips, and/or solder balls with an approved solvent.

Wired chassis devices containing terminal boards, resistor and capacitor assemblies, rf coils, switches, sockets, inductors, transformers, and other wired parts should be cleaned as follows:

NOTE:

When necessary to disturb the dress of wires and cables, note the positions before disturbing and restore them to proper dress after cleaning. Blow dust from surfaces, holes, and recesses using an air jet. Finish cleaning chassis by wiping finished surfaces with a lint-free cloth moistened with solvent. Dry with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth. When thoroughly clean, touch-up any minor damage to the finish. Protect the chassis from dust, moisture, and damage pending inspection.

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (4)

Ceramic and plastic parts should be cleaned as follows: (a) (b) (c) Blow dust from surfaces, holes, and recesses using an air jet. Finish cleaning chassis by wiping finished surfaces with a lint-free cloth moistened with solvent. Dry with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth.

Page 4004 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 CHECK
1. General This section provides procedures to perform a visual inspection of the unit. 2. Inspection Procedures A. Cover Inspect the cover for dents, deformation, or damage to the finish that should be repaired. B. Front Panel Check that name, serial number, and plates or stickers are secure and hardware is tight. C. Chassis Inspect chassis for loose or missing mounting hardware, deformation, dents, damaged fasteners, or damaged connectors. Check for corrosion or damage to the finish that should be repaired. D. Hardware, Covers and Shields Inspect for bent, warped, stripped, dented or corroded parts. Check for damaged fasteners. Check plating, painting, and identification stencils for worn, exposed, or scratched surfaces. E. Circuit Boards Inspect for loose, broken or corroded terminal connections and damage; such as cracks, burns, or charred track. Check for insufficient solder, proper bonding, fungus, mold or other deposits that should be repaired. F. Connectors Inspect connector bodies for broken parts, check insulation for cracks, and check contacts for damage, misalignment, corrosion, or bad plating. Check for broken, loose, or poorly soldered connections to connector terminals. Inspect connector hoods and cable clamps for crimped wires. G. Terminal Connections Inspect for corrosion or loose connections.

34-40-11

Page 5001 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
H. Terminal Connections, Soldered (1) (2) (3) I. Inspect for cold soldered or rosin joints. Bad joints can be recognized by a dull porous appearance. Check for excessive solder, insufficient solder, or solder splashes resulting from previous repair. Check for corrosion at the terminal connections.

Wiring Inspect wiring of the chassis and subassemblies for any signs of physical damage or charring.

J.

Capacitors Inspect capacitors for case or body damage and for loose, broken, or corroded terminal connections.

K.

Resistors and Diodes Inspect for blistered, charred, or cracked bodies. Check for loose, broken, or corroded terminal connections.

L.

Filters and Inductors Inspect for damage to body or casting and for loose, broken, or corroded terminal connections. Check for secure mounting to chassis.

M.

Transformers Inspect for damage to case and for signs of excessive heating. Check for loose, broken, or corroded terminal connections.

N.

Transistors and Integrated Circuits Inspect for damage to body or casing. secure attachment to sockets. Check for proper and

O.

Rotary Switches Check for proper mechanical operation: no binding or looseness should be evidenced.

P.

Insulators Inspect for looseness and/or evidence of damage such as burned areas, cracks, and broken or chipped edges.

Page 5002 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 REPAIR
1. General This section contains information for repair of the unit. The repair or replacement of damaged parts usually involves standard service techniques suggested by examination of drawings and equipment. Some repairs, however, demand an exact repair sequence to ensure proper operation of the equipment. After correcting a malfunction in any section of the unit, the functional test in Test and Fault Isolation paragraph 3. should be performed.

CAUTION: THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE


(ESDS) DEVICES. ALL MODULES CONTAINING ESDS DEVICES ARE FLAGGED OR IDENTIFIED ON SCHEMATICS AND ASSEMBLY ILLUSTRATIONS, AND ARE INDIVIDUALLY IDENTIFIED IN THE PARTS LIST. ALL ESDS DEVICES MUST BE HANDLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROCEDURES OUTLINED IN THE REPAIR SECTION OF THIS MANUAL.

ESDS DEVICES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, C-MOS, JMOS, PMOS, NMOS, SOCMOS, HMOS, MOS/FET, MICROWAVE MIXER DIODES, SOME BIPOLAR DEVICES, AND SOME METAL FILM RESISTORS. MOST DAMAGE TO ESDS DEVICES RESULTS IN DEGRADED PERFORMANCE OR PREMATURE FAILURE, NOT IN CATASTROPHIC FAILURE AT THE TIME EXPERIENCED. 2. Repair Procedures A. Repair Precautions (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Refer to paragraph 2.B. for special ESDS and MOS handling precautions. Perform repairs and replace components with power disconnected from equipment. Use a conductive table top for repairs. Connect table to ground conductors of 60Hz and 400Hz power lines. Replace connectors, shield conductors, and twisted pairs ONLY with identical items. Standard references to printed circuit boards in this manual include the following terms. "Component side" and "nearside" refer to the side components are located on. "Solder side" and "farside" refer to the side opposite component side. "Nearside" on surface mount boards with components on both sides is the side with J#### and P#### connector numbers. When replacing parts, carefully observe lead dress and component orientation. Keep leads as short as possible and observe correct repair techniques.

(6)

34-40-11

Page 6001 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(7) Surface mount components require special soldering techniques. The soldering iron tip should not touch the ceramic component body. The iron should be applied only to the termination-solder filet. Observe cable routing within unit prior to disassembly, to enable proper routing of cables during reassembly.

(8) B.

Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) Devices Devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge are used in this equipment. These devices, including metal oxide semiconductors, some metal film resistors, and other devices, are susceptible to damage by electrostatic charges and high-voltage fields. Because of the very high resistance in ESDS devices, they can be damaged by low current electrical sources that would not damage standard semiconductors. Special precautions must be taken during handling and repair procedures to prevent damage. The human body is the most common low-energy source causing damage to ESDS devices. The body generates and retains static electricity, in conjunction with non-conductive garments and floor covering. An individual can easily develop several thousand volts of electrostatic charge while simply walking across the floor or moving around in a chair. Electrostatic charges of 20 kV can develop on personnel, and 35 kV on their garments. The capacitive elements in all MOS devices, and in linear integrated circuits, hybrids, and bipolar integrated circuits can be destroyed by a voltage field, even when installed in their circuits. Not all electrostatic damage will result in immediate catastrophic failure. Damaged devices may operate within their minimum limits but can experience early field failure or erratic performance later. The following precautions are recommended for ESDS circuits, and are especially important in low humidity, high static conditions.

CAUTION: ESDS DEVICES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, C-MOS,
J-MOS, PMOS, NMOS, SOCMOS, HMOS, MOS/FET, MICROWAVE MIXER DIODES, SOME BIPOLAR DEVICES, AND SOME METAL FILM RESISTORS. FORMANCE OR PREMATURE FAILURE, NOT IN CATASTROPHIC FAILURE AT THE TIME EXPERIENCED.

CAUTION: MOST DAMAGE TO ESDS DEVICES RESULTS IN DEGRADED PER-

(1)

Storage Store and transport all ESDS devices in conductive material. Do not insert ESDS devices into conventional plastic trays used for storing and transporting standard

Page 6002 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
semiconductor devices. Special bags or containers must have a maximum resistivity of 104 ohms/cm, or the leads of the device must be shorted together through a conductive material (special foam) having a maximum resistivity of 104 ohms/cm. Modules, circuit boards, or assemblies containing ESDS devices must be stored in static shielding bags with a maximum resistivity of 104 ohms/cm in the outer layer of the bag, and 1012 ohms/cm resistivity in the inner layer. A caution label shall be attached to the outside of all containers containing ESDS devices. The ESDS labels are identified in the advisory information located in the front of this manual. Do not remove device from container until actually used or tested. (2) Work Station All equipment, tools, materials, and personnel at the work station must be maintained at the same electrical potential. All grounding connections shall have a common point, and that point shall be connected to electrical ground. Soldering irons shall be isolated from the power line by transformer, or shall be direct current isolated. The soldering iron must be grounded and have a resistance of less than 0.2 ohm from the tip to ground when the iron is hot. Test equipment shall have all exposed metallic surfaces electrically connected to the test equipment power system ground (through 200 ohms or less). Do not use rubber mats, carpets, and rugs in the work station area. Use grounded conductive mats. Do not allow nonconductive items on the workbench. This includes such items as plastic ash trays, cellophane wrappers, plastic tools, Styrofoam coffee cups, etc. Maintain the relative humidity higher than 40 percent (minimum) in the work area. Keep all material and work surfaces CLEAN in the work area. Wash with damp cloth when necessary. Keep the work station static-safe. Periodically check the area with a static meter. When a dangerous reading is observed, remove the nonconductor or take precautions to prevent contact with ESDS devices. (3) Personnel

34-40-11

Page 6003 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
When handling electrostatic discharge sensitive devices or assemblies, wear a skin-contact wrist strap connected to the work station common ground.

WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT PERSONNEL DIRECTLY TO EARTH OR

BUILDING GROUND. USE A COMMERCIAL GROUNDING STRAP WITH 1 MEGOHM IN THE CORD TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM ELECTRICAL SHOCK. OR TESTING HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUITS WITH POWER APPLIED.

WARNING: DO NOT WEAR GROUND STRAP WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING

Do not wear smocks, gloves, finger cots, or sleeve protectors made of plastic, nylon, or rubber in the area where ESDS devices are handled. When the operator is properly grounded, contact with the operator's hand will provide sufficient ground for hand tools or other tools that may be electrically isolated from ground. (4) Special Troubleshooting Precautions In addition to the above considerations, the following specific precautions should be observed when troubleshooting or repairing modules containing ESDS devices. Do not use high velocity dry air for applying heat during troubleshooting. Special infrared heat devices should be used. Do not use Freon spray during troubleshooting. To cool components, use antistatic quick-chill sprays. Remember, even when the ESDS device is installed on a printed circuit board it can STILL be damaged by electrostatic discharge. C. PC Board, Two-Lead Component Removal (Resistors, Capacitors, Diodes, etc.) (1) (2) Note orientation of part. Clip one lead close to component body and bend component off board. Grasp component and heat its lead hole from component side of board. When solder flows, lift component from board and discard. Grasp remaining lead, heat its lead hole and lift from board. Melt solder in each hole. Use a desoldering suction tool to remove solder from each hole. Dress and form leads of replacement part.

(3) (4) (5)

Page 6004 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(6) (7) D. Insert replacement component observing correct orientation. Solder component in place. Clip leads on solder side of board.

PC Board, Multi-Lead Component Removal (IC's etc.) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Note orientation of part. Clip each lead of component, as close to component as possible. Discard component. Heat each hole from solder side and remove clipped lead from hole. Melt solder in each hole. Use a desoldering suction tool to remove solder from each hole. Insert replacement component observing correct orientation. Solder component in place on farside of board. Avoid solder runs. Clip leads on solder side of board.

E.

Replacement of Power Transistors (1) (2) Unsolder leads and remove attaching hardware. transistor and hard-coat insulator. Remove

Apply Thermal Joint Compound Type 120 (Wakefield Engineering, Inc.) to the mounting surface of the replacement transistor. Reinstall the transistor insulator and the power transistor using hardware removed in step (1). After installing the replacement transistor, but before making any electrical connections, measure the resistance between the case of the transistor and the chassis to ensure that the insulation is effective. The resistance measured should be greater than 10MW. Reconnect leads to transistor and solder in place.

(3) (4)

(5) F.

Replacement of Printed Circuit Board Protective Coating

WARNING: CONFORMAL COATING CONTAINS TOXIC VAPORS!


WITH ADEQUATE VENTILATION! (1) (2)

USE ONLY

Clean repaired area of printed circuit board per instructions in the Cleaning section (400) of this manual. Apply Conformal Coating Humiseal #1B-31 HYSOL PC20-35M01 (Humiseal Division, Columbia Chase Corp., 24-60 Brooklyn Queens Expressway West, Woodside, N.Y., 11377) Honeywell p/n 016-01040-0000.

34-40-11

Page 6005 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
(3) (4) (5) G. Shake container well before using. Spray or brush surfaces with smooth, even strokes: if spraying hold nozzle 10-15 inches from work surface. Cure time is ten minutes at room temperature.

Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM) Replacement The read only memory packages are specially programmed devices to provide specific logic outputs required for the operation in the control unit. The manufacturer's part (type) number is for the unprogrammed device and cannot be used. The Honeywell part number must be used to obtain the correctly programmed device. Refer to the "Illustrated Parts List" (IPL).

Page 6006 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
ASSEMBLY 1. General This section provides procedures for assembly of the unit and its subassemblies. Assembly procedure are to be followed after the unit has been disassembled for repair, cleaning, inspection, or modification by service bulletin.

WARNING: REMOVE ALL POWER FROM UNIT BEFORE ASSEMBLY OF ANY MODULE.
VOLTAGE TRANSIENTS ARE DANGEROUS TO LIFE. VOLTAGE TRANSIENTS CAN DAMAGE THE EQUIPMENT.

CAUTION: EXERCISE EXTREME CARE WHEN DISCONNECTING AND RECONNECTING


MULTIPLE PIN CONNECTORS. ENSURE THAT CONNECTORS ARE NOT DAMAGED BY MISALIGNMENT OF THE PINS.

CAUTION: THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE

(ESDS) DEVICES. EQUIPMENT MODULES AND ESDS DEVICES MUST BE HANDLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIAL ESDS HANDLING PROCEDURES.

2.

Materials Required For Assembly Table 7001 lists materials used in assembly of the unit. Equivalent substitutes may be used for listed sealants, staking compounds, and thermal componds.

REPRESENTATIVE TYPE Loctite 242 Conformal Coating Humiseal #1B-31 HYSOL PC 20-35M-01 Adhesive-Sealant RTV 3145 Superbonder 414 Thermal Compound Nylon Cable Tie Solder, 60% Tin 40% Lead

QUANTITY USED Thin coat to threads of screws and retaining nuts Thin coats on all components, not on connectors Thin coat for adhesion Thin coat to threads of screws and retaining nuts Thin coat on power transistor insulator (both sides) As required to secure wiring As required for connections

Table 7001 Sealants and Staking Compounds

34-40-11

Page 7001 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

3.

Recommended Reassembly Procedures. Apply Loctite 425 to the threads of all screws, set screws and standoffs before installation. Torque all screws per table 7002 unless otherwise indicated.

Table 7002 Torque Specifications


A. Tilt Motor Installation (1) Install the four screws (089-05878-0005) to fasten the tilt motor (200-05173-0000) to the mounting plate (04709947-0001). Attach the ground lug (008-00073-0000) to the mounting plate. Install the four screws (089-05878-0006) to secure the mounting plate to the tilt sensor assembly (200-055540000). Reroute and tie cable to restore as originally found. Install the screw (089-05878-0004) which secures the cable to the base.

(2) (3)

(4) (5)

B.

Scan Motor Installation (1) Place the bottom pivot bracket (073-00936-0002) into position on the base (073-00925-0002). Apply a coat of Aeroshell 22 to both sides of washers (076-02876-0001

Page 7002 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
and 088-03164-0000). Install the azimuth pivot (07602278-0001), washers and 088-03164-0000) and azimuth nut (089-02344-0003). Torque the azimuth nut to 18 in.-lbs. Install the four screws (089-05878-0004) which fasten the scan motor (200-05173-0000) to the pivot bracket. (2) (3) Attach the ground lug (008-00300-0004). Install the four cap screws (089-06494-0018) which secure the bottom pivot bracket to the base. Tighten cap screws using 18 in.-lbs. of torque. Reroute and tie cable to restore as originally found. Install the screw (089-05878-0004) which secures the cable to the base.

(4) (5) C.

Magnetron Installation See also paragraph 2.G. in the Repair section of this manual. (1) Attach the magnetron (200-05310-0000) to the rf network (015-00250-0000) using four cap screws (089-064940005). Attach the ground lug as shown in the gimbal assembly drawing in the IPL. Use only a beryllium copper Allen wrench.

NOTE:
(2)

Never use tools containing ferrous metal when working with the magnetron.

Reroute and tie cables exactly as shown in figure 703 and 704. Note the ordering and orientation of cables and cable clip (047-10683-0001). Routing and position of cables and ties is critical to prevent interference through the full range of movement of the gimbal and premature wear of the cables. Set the cable ferrules into the channels at the top of the base in the order shown in figure 7004. Install the cover (047-10124-0001) using three screws (089-05874-0004).

(3) (4)

34-40-11

Page 7003 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 NOTE: Route ground lug wire under Teflon liner.

Figure 7003 Magnetron Cable Dressing


D. Preamp Board Installation (1) Replace the buss wire on E1, E2, E3 and E4 of the receiver module (015-00238-0001) with new pieces of 22 gage buss wire, each 1 inch long. Place the preamp board (200-08545-0000) into the housing while threading the buss wire through E1, E2, E3 and E4 on the preamp board. Secure the board with three standoffs (one 076-028250001 and two 076-02825-0000). Apply solder to E1, E2, E3 and E4. tions. Clean the connec-

(2)

(3) (4) (5)

Reconnect the cables. Use extreme care when replacing P1001. Be certain that the connector is centered and square with the pin before applying pressure to insert. Install the cover (047-09953-0001) and secure with three screws (089-05874-0003).

(6)

Page 7004 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

E.

Receiver Module Installation (1) Place the limiter (015-00239-0001) with the cable shroud (088-03148-0000) between the receiver module (20005553-0000) and the rf network (015-00250-0000) with the arrow pointing toward the receiver module. Place the cable guard (088-03123-0001) against the receiver. Secure the parts to the rf network using four cap screws (089-06494-0028). Tighten to 18 in.-lbs.. Reroute and tie cables exactly as shown in figure 704. Routing and position of cables and ties is critical to prevent interference through the full range of movement of the gimbal and premature wear of the cables.

(2) (3)

NOTE:

Route ground lug wire under Teflon liner.

Figure 7004 Magnetron and Preamp Cable Dressing (4) (5) Set the cable ferrules into the channels at the top of the base. Install the cover (047-10124-0001) enclosing the cable ferrules using three screws (089-05874-0004).

34-40-11

Page 7005 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
F. Power Supply Board Installation (1) (2) Reconnect and reroute all cables. Place the power supply board (200-08540-0000) into the base (073-00925-0002). Make certain that no cables have been pinched. Install two standoffs (076-02868-0000) in the two hole on the transformer end of the board. Do not tighten. Install the other two standoffs (076-02868-0001) on either side of the fan. Do not tighten. Install four board screws (089-05903-0004). tighten. Do not

(3)

(4) (5)

Using three screws (089-05903-0004), secure the heatsink (047-10675-0001) to the base. Tighten all screws and standoffs.

G.

Logic Board Installation (1) Reconnect all cables. Use extreme care when replacing P5502. Be certain that the connector is centered and square with the pin before applying pressure to insert. Install the if cover. Place the logic board (200-08549-0000) into the base (073-00925-0002). Make certain no cables have been pinched. Install two connector screws (089-05878-0004) securing the connector to the base. Do not tighten screws. Install the screw (089-05903-0004) in the center of the logic board. Tighten all screws.

(2) (3)

(4) (5)

H.

Cover Installation (1) (2) (3) Place the cover (047-09968-0001) on the base (073-009250002) with the handle toward the connector side. Install the two screws (089-06008-0004) on either side of the connector. Do not tighten. Install the remaining nine screws (089-06008-0007). Tighten all screws.

Page 7006 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT


1. General This section contains information on special tools. fixtures, and test equipment used to test, troubleshoot, and repair the unit. 2. Equipment Required to Test Table 9001 is a listing of the test equipment required to perform the testing and troubleshooting procedures described in this manual. Equipment other than that listed in table 9001 can be substituted if it is technically equal or better than that listed.

ITEM DESCRIPTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Power Supply Oscilloscope Digital Multimeter Radar Test Set Spectrum Analyzer X10 Probe (10 M) Current Probe Signal Generator ARINC 429 Receiver/Transmitter Vertical Gyro Simulator Dummy Load Waveguide Adapter IN 182A Stop Watch Bench Tester/Harness Bench Test Kit KPA 900 Conf. Module Programmer PC

CHARACTERISTICS REQUIRED +28 VDC, regulated to 40 Vdc @ 20 amps. Tektronix 465 Fluke 8000A IFR RD 300/301/301A with Option 1* or Gigatronix WR109 HP 8593A Tektronix P6000 Tektronix P6021 Capable of 60 MHz JCAIR 429E Capable of 50 mV/degree Weinschel 1425-4 Hewlett-Packard X281A Known to meet specifications Shop Fabricated (see figure 9001) Part Number 050-03299-0000 Part Number 050-03311-0000 IBM Compatible 386 or higher, MS DOS 3.3 or higher, 3.5 inch drive, greater than 10 M HDD

Table 9001 Test Equipment Required Page 9001 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
3. Equipment Required for Disassembly Table 9002 is a listing of the equipment required to perform the disassembly procedures described in this manual. Equipment other than that listed in table 9002 can be substituted if their characteristics equal or exceed that of the listed equipment.

ITEM 1. 2.

DESCRIPTION 9/64" Allen Wrench Engagement/Disengagement Tool

CHARACTERISTICS REQUIRED Beryllium Copper M/A-COM OMNI Spectra P/N 2598-5342-54

Table 9002 Disassembly Equipment Required


4. Equipment Required for Assembly Table 9003 is a listing of the equipment required to perform the assembly procedures described in this manual. Equipment other than that listed in table 9003 can be substituted if their characteristics equal or exceed that of the listed equipment.

ITEM 1. 2. 3.

DESCRIPTION 9/64" Allen Wrench Torque Wrench Engagement/Disengagement Tool

CHARACTERISTICS REQUIRED Beryllium Copper Capable of 45 in.-oz. to 18 in.-lbs. M/A-COM OMNI Spectra P/N 2598-5342-54

Table 9003 Assembly Equipment Required

Page 9002 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

FIGURE 9001 ART 2000 HARNESS DRAWING

34-40-11

Page 9003 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST


1. General The Illustrated Parts List (IPL) is a complete list of assemblies and parts required for the unit. The IPL also provides for the proper identification of replacement parts. Individual parts lists within this IPL are arranged in numerical sequence starting with the top assembly and continuing with the sub-assemblies. All mechanical parts will be separated from the electrical parts used on the sub-assembly. Each parts list is followed by a component location drawing. Parts identified in this IPL by AlliedSignal part number meet design specifications for this equipment and are the recommended replacement parts. Warranty information concerning AlliedSignal replacement parts is contained in Service Memo #1, P/N 600-08001-00XX. 2. Revision Service The manual will be revised as necessary to reflect current information. 3. List of Abbreviations Name Motor or Synchro Capacitor Circuit Jumper Diode Lamp Voltage or Signal Connect Point Fuse Filter Feedthru Integrated Circuit Jack or Fixed Connector Table 10001 Abbreviations

Abbreviation B C CJ CR DS E F FL FT I J

34-40-11

Page 10001 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000 Abbreviation L M P Q R RT S T TP U V W Y Name Inductor Meter Plug Transistor Resistor Thermistor Switch Transformer Test Point Component Network, Integrated Circuit, Circuit Assembly Photocell/Vacuum Tube Waveguide Crystal Table 10001 (Continued) Abbreviations

Page 10002 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

4.

Sample Parts List

Figure 10001

Sample Parts List

34-40-11

Page 10003 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Page 10004 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-05170-0000 R 12

Final Assembly Drawing Figure 2 (Sheet 1 of 2)

34-40-11

Page 10005 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-05170-0000 R12

Final Assembly Drawing Figure 2 (Sheet 2 of 2)

34-40-11

Page 10007 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 071-01519-0101 SYMBOL -------REF1 REF100 Desrciption Final Assy. ART 2000 Rev. 18

PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0101 --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------300-05170-0000 ART 2000 & 2100 FI RF 0 000-00852-0109 ART 2000 PROD STRU RF 0 012-01005-0005 TAPE MYLAR 1 W IN 1.8 012-01361-0002 TAPE LACING IN 80 012-01562-0000 VELCRO TAPE LOOP EA 2 012-01562-0001 VELCRO TAPE HOOK EA 2 012-01563-0000 INSUL IF COVER BIG EA 1 012-01564-0000 INSUL I/F COVER EA 1 012-01573-0000 SUPER BOND TAPE IN 1.5 016-01082-0000 DC RTV 3145 AR 1 016-01268-0000 LOCTITE 271 AR 1 016-01278-0007 LUBRICANT AR 1 016-01407-0000 LOCTITE BLK MAX380 AR 1 025-00024-0000 WIRE 22AWG BLK IN 4.5 035-01540-0018 BAG STATIC 18X18 EA 1 047-09951-0001 PLATE STOP EA 1 047-09968-0001 COVER W/FINISH EA 1 047-10021-0001 FENCE COVER I/F EA 1 047-10124-0001 CLMP WIRE TB W/F EA 1 047-10549-0001 DIP SW COVER W/FIN EA 1 047-10880-0001 GND SPRING W/FIN EA 1 057-01540-0000 WARNING HV TAG EA 1 057-02203-0001 FLAVOR STCKR EA 1 057-03511-0001 DECAL, CAUTION EA 1 057-05656-0000 S/N TAG, ART 2000 EA 1 057-05716-0000 DECAL BD REMOVAL EA 1 057-05728-0000 WAVEGUIDE COVER EA 1 057-05734-0000 LABEL, RF RAD WARN EA 1 073-00925-0002 BASE W/FINISH EA 1 073-00936-0002 PVT BRKT BOT W/F EA 1 076-02278-0001 PVT PIN AZIM W/F EA 2 076-02868-0000 SPACER 4-40 .250 EA 2 076-02868-0001 SPACER 4-40 .605 EA 2 076-02876-0001 WASHER THRUST EA 2 088-03158-0000 BUMPER SCAN GEAR EA 2 088-03164-0000 LOAD WASHER EA 2 089-02344-0003 NUT LOCK 10-32 EA 2 089-05874-0004 SCR PHP 2-56X1/4 EA 3 089-05878-0004 SCR PHP 4-40X1/4 EA 11 089-05903-0004 SCR PHP 4-40X1/4 EA 6 089-05903-0022 SCR PHP 4-40X1 3/8 EA 2 089-06008-0004 SCR FHP 4-40X1/4 EA 2 089-06008-0007 SCR FHP 4-40X7/16 EA 9 089-06494-0005 SCR SHC 8-32X5/16 EA 1 089-06494-0007 SCR SHC 8-32X7/16 EA 8 089-08111-0034 WSHR SPLT LK #8 EA 9 089-08158-0011 WSHR FLT #8 EA 7 090-00988-0000 TWIST LOK CBL CLIP EA 1 090-00990-0010 PROTECTIVE CAP, SU EA 1 091-00109-0000 CABLE TIE EA 2 150-00096-0000 TUBING SHRINK 1/8 IN 3 150-00096-0001 TUBING SHRINK 3/16 IN 2.5 150-00096-0002 TUBING SHRINK 1/4 IN 5 200-05174-0000 AZIMUTH MOTOR ASSY EA 1 200-05175-0020 GIMBAL ASSY EA 1 200-05313-0000 SCAN SENSOR ASSY EA 1 206-00246-0109 ART2000 SW HW SET EA 1

34-40-11

Page 10009 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10010 June/2002

34-40-11

n
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 206-00246-0104 Desrciption ART 2000 SW/HW set Rev. 0

SYMBOL PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0109 -------- --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------REF1 716-00236-0109 DOC INDEX ART 2000 RF 0 057-05287-0109 SOFTWARE MOD. TAG EA 1 200-08548-0020 PWR SUPPLY/MOD BD EA 1 205-00717-1109 LOGIC BD SW SET EA 1

34-40-11

Page 10011 June/2002

n
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

This page is reserved

Page 10012 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 205-00717-0003 Desrciption Logic Bd. S/W set Rev. 0

SYMBOL PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -1109 -------- --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------REF1 300-08549-0020 ART 2100 LOGIC BD RF 0 057-05252-0717 ART2100 HW/SW BOM EA 1 057-05335-0009 DECAL 205 DASH 09 EA 1 057-05335-0011 DECAL 205 DASH 11 EA 1 125-00751-0109 LOGIC BD SW EA 1 200-08549-0020 ART 2100 LOGIC BD EA 1

34-40-11

Page 10013 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10014 June/2002

34-40-11

hn
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 126-00047-0001 Desrciption ART 2100 FPGA ROM Rev. 0

SYMBOL PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0004 -------- --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------U13 122-30049-0004 ART 2000/2100 FPGA EA 1 226-00104-0003 WX PROCESSING RF 0 226-00105-0003 STC PROCESSING RF 0 226-00106-0002 453 PROCESSING RF 0 226-00107-0004 DECOPE FPGA RF 0 721-00596-0004 EPLD DOC ART 2000/ RF 0

34-40-11

Page 10015 June/2002

hn
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10016 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08548-0000 R-16

Power Supply/Modulator Board Figure 3 (Sheet 1 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 10017 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08548-0000 R-16

Power Supply/Modulator Board Figure 3 (Sheet 2 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 10019 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08548-0000 R-16

Power Supply/Modulator Board Figure 3 (Sheet 3 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 10021 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08548-0000 R-16

Power Supply/Modulator Board Figure 3 (Sheet 4 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 10023 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 200-08548-0000 SYMBOL -------B4001 C4004 C4005 C4006 C4007 C4008 C4009 C4010 C4011 C4012 C4013 C4014 C4016 C4017 C4018 C4019 C4020 C4021 C4023 C4024 C4025 C4026 C4027 C4028 C4029 C4030 C4031 C4032 C4033 C4034 C4035 C4036 C4037 C4038 C4039 C4040 C4041 C4042 C4043 C4044 C4045 C4046 C4047 C4049 C4050 C4051 C4052 C4053 C4054 C4055 C4056 C4057 C4058 C4059 C4060 C4061 C4062 C4063 Desrciption POWER SUPPLY/MOD BOARD Rev. AB

PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0020 --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------148-05186-0000 FAN BRUSHLESS EA 1 106-04153-0047 CAP CH 15K X7R/50V EA 1 106-04471-0026 CH 470PF NPO/100V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04103-0046 CAP CH 10K X7R/50V EA 1 106-04332-0046 CAP CH 3.3K X7R/50 EA 1 097-00218-0004 CAP EL 330UF 50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 105-00169-0000 CAP MYLAR 5VFD EA 1 118-00082-0000 CAP CR .005UF 1KV EA 1 105-00169-0000 CAP MYLAR 5VFD EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04102-0046 CAP CH 1K 50V 5% EA 1 096-01186-0022 CAP 4.7UF 25V 10% EA 1 096-01082-0052 CAP TN 47UF 35V EA 1 096-01082-0065 CAP TN 100UF 20V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04102-0046 CAP CH 1K 50V 5% EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 097-00218-0004 CAP EL 330UF 50V EA 1 106-04103-0046 CAP CH 10K X7R/50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 097-00217-0008 CAP AL/0 68UF 20V EA 1 096-01186-0018 CAP 6.8UF 20V 10% EA 1 106-00122-0000 CH CAP .33UF 50V EA 1 097-00217-0008 CAP AL/0 68UF 20V EA 1 096-01186-0018 CAP 6.8UF 20V 10% EA 1 106-00122-0000 CH CAP .33UF 50V EA 1 096-01082-0025 CAP TN 150UF 10V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 097-00218-0004 CAP EL 330UF 50V EA 1 106-04103-0046 CAP CH 10K X7R/50V EA 1 097-00218-0003 CAP EL 470UF 25V EA 1 097-00217-0009 CAP EL 100UF 16V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 097-00218-0004 CAP EL 330UF 50V EA 1 096-01082-0055 CAP TN 22UF 50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 096-01186-0011 CAP 47UF 10V 10% EA 1 097-00218-0003 CAP EL 470UF 25V EA 1 097-00218-0005 CAP EL 22UF 100V EA 1 096-01186-0011 CAP 47UF 10V 10% EA 1 096-01186-0014 CAP 10.0UF 16V 10% EA 1 097-00217-0013 CAP EL 220UF 10V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-00124-0000 CAP CH CR .15 500V EA 1

34-40-11

Page 10025 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
C4064 C4065 C4066 C4067 C4068 C4069 C4070 C4073 C4074 C4095 C4096 C4097 C4098 C4099 C4100 C4101 C4102 C4109 C4119 C4120 C4122 C4123 C4124 C4125 C4126 C4127 C4128 C4129 C4132 C4133 C4134 C4136 C4137 C4138 C4139 C4140 C4141 C4142 C4143 C4144 C4145 C4146 C4149 C4152 C4153 C4154 C4155 C4156 C4157 CJ4001 CJ4002 CJ4013 CJ4014 CJ4015 CJ4016 CJ4017 CJ4018 CJ4019 CR4001 CR4004 CR4005 CR4008 CR4009 106-00124-0000 097-00217-0013 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 096-01082-0055 096-01082-0055 106-00122-0000 106-00122-0000 106-04153-0046 106-04153-0046 106-04153-0046 106-04153-0046 106-04821-0016 106-04821-0016 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-00122-0000 106-04153-0046 106-04153-0046 106-00122-0000 106-04153-0046 106-04153-0046 106-04821-0016 106-04821-0016 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 097-00218-0004 106-04751-0016 106-04102-0026 096-01082-0055 106-04103-0046 106-04103-0047 096-01186-0022 106-04103-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0047 106-04221-0014 106-04221-0014 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 026-00018-0001 026-00018-0001 130-05000-0035 130-05000-0035 130-05000-0035 130-05000-0035 130-05000-0035 130-05000-0035 130-05000-0035 007-06141-0005 007-06446-0000 007-06141-0005 007-06177-0000 007-06141-0005 CAP CH CR .15 500V CAP EL 220UF 10V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP TN 22UF 50V CAP TN 22UF 50V CH CAP .33UF 50V CH CAP .33UF 50V CAP CH 15KX7R/50V CAP CH 15KX7R/50V CAP CH 15KX7R/50V CAP CH 15KX7R/50V CAP CH820PFNPO/50V CAP CH820PFNPO/50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CH CAP .33UF 50V CAP CH 15KX7R/50V CAP CH 15KX7R/50V CH CAP .33UF 50V CAP CH 15KX7R/50V CAP CH 15KX7R/50V CAP CH820PFNPO/50V CAP CH820PFNPO/50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP EL 330UF 50V CH 750PF NPO/50V CH 1KPF NPO/100V CAP TN 22UF 50V CAP CH 10K X7R/50V CH 10K X7R/50V CAP 4.7UF 25V 10% CAP CH 10K X7R/50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CH 100KX7R/50V CAPCH 220PF NPO 2% CAPCH 220PF NPO 2% CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V WIRE CKTJMPR 24AWG WIRE CKTJMPR 24AWG RES CH 0 QW CJ RES CH 0 QW CJ RES CH 0 QW CJ RES CH 0 QW CJ RES CH 0 QW CJ RES CH 0 QW CJ RES CH 0 QW CJ DIO UF RECOV 1000V DIO ULTRAFAST 600V DIO UF RECOV 1000V SMD DIO SI MMBD914 DIO UF RECOV 1000V EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Page 10026 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
CR4010 CR4015 CR4016 CR4017 CR4018 CR4021 CR4022 CR4025 CR4026 CR4030 CR4031 CR4034 CR4036 CR4037 CR4038 CR4039 CR4040 CR4041 E4003 E4004 F4001 J4001 J4002 J4003 L4001 L4003 L4004 L4005 L4006 L4007 L4008 L4009 L4009 L4009 L4009 L4009 L4009 L4009 L4009 Q4001 Q4004 Q4007 Q4010 Q4015 Q4017 Q4018 Q4019 Q4020 Q4021 Q4022 Q4023 Q4026 Q4027 Q4028 R4006 R4008 R4009 R4010 R4011 R4012 R4013 R4014 R4015 007-06141-0005 007-06444-0002 007-06444-0002 007-06444-0002 007-06444-0002 007-06177-0000 007-05245-0025 007-06444-0002 007-06444-0002 007-06177-0000 007-06177-0000 007-06181-0000 007-06177-0000 007-06177-0000 007-05241-0001 134-01026-0006 007-06444-0002 007-06182-0000 008-00008-0002 008-00008-0002 036-00057-0010 030-02520-0003 030-02832-0003 030-02832-0003 019-02368-0000 019-02368-0000 019-02368-0000 019-02332-0000 019-02332-0000 019-02332-0000 019-02332-0000 019-02331-0000 019-02331-0002 019-02331-0005 019-02331-0006 019-02331-0008 019-02331-0010 019-02331-0011 019-02331-0012 007-00961-0000 007-00961-0000 007-01033-0000 007-00179-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00261-0003 007-00937-0000 007-00257-0001 007-00432-0002 007-00254-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00261-0003 007-00257-0001 007-00467-0000 007-00179-0001 139-00200-0000 139-01002-0000 139-02002-0000 139-00221-0000 139-01001-0000 139-02742-0000 132-00102-0017 131-00100-0033 131-00101-0033 DIO UF RECOV 1000V DIO 1A 150V SMD DIO 1A 150V SMD DIO 1A 150V SMD DIO 1A 150V SMD SMD DIO SI MMBD914 DIO Z 36V SMD DIO 1A 150V SMD DIO 1A 150V SMD SMD DIO SI MMBD914 SMD DIO SI MMBD914 DIO DUAL MMBD2835 SMD DIO SI MMBD914 SMD DIO SI MMBD914 TRNSRB 1500W 33V VRSTR VI00ZA15 81V DIO 1A 150V SMD DIO DUAL MMBD2837 TERM SPLIT TURR TERM SPLIT TURR FUSE 275 125V 5A CONN RT ANG HDR 40 TERMINAL PC HEADER TERMINAL PC HEADER TOROID CHOKE TOROID CHOKE TOROID CHOKE CHOKE PARASITIC CHOKE PARASITIC CHOKE PARASITIC CHOKE PARASITIC FIL IND .180-.230 FIL IND .300-.355 FIL IND .455-.500 FIL IND .630-.685 FIL IND .980-1.10 FIL IND 1.50-1.70 FIL IND 1.70-1.90 FIL IND 2.50-2.80 FET POWER FET POWER SCR 600V XSTR SOT23 2N3904 XSTR SOT23 2N3904 XSTR 2N2907A (SOT) XSTR P-CHAN HEXFET MMBTA42 SO PKG THYRISTOR 2N6402 XSTR S PNP SOT-23 XSTR SOT23 2N3904 XSTR 2N2907A (SOT) MMBTA42 SO PKG XSTR S NPN MMBTA06 XSTR SOT23 2N3904 RES CH 20.0 EW 1% RES CHIP 10K EW 1% RES CHIP 20.0KEW1% RES CH 22.1 EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CHIP 27.4KEW1% RES WW .24 1W 5% RES CF 10 HW 5% RES CF 100 HW 5% EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 .125 .125 .125 .125 .125 .125 .125 .125 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

34-40-11

Page 10027 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
R4016 R4020 R4021 R4022 R4023 R4024 R4028 R4029 R4030 R4031 R4032 R4033 R4036 R4037 R4050 R4051 R4052 R4053 R4054 R4059 R4060 R4061 R4062 R4063 R4064 R4066 R4067 R4068 R4069 R4070 R4071 R4074 R4077 R4078 R4079 R4080 R4081 R4084 R4086 R4087 R4088 R4089 R4090 R4091 R4092 R4093 R4094 R4096 R4097 R4098 R4102 R4107 R4108 R4109 R4110 R4111 R4135 R4136 R4137 R4138 R4139 R4140 R4141 136-01023-0072 136-01023-0072 139-02211-0000 139-05113-0000 139-04022-0000 139-04322-0000 139-01371-0000 139-03321-0000 130-05027-0043 130-05027-0043 139-01001-0000 139-04751-0000 130-05027-0043 130-05027-0043 139-06812-0000 139-06811-0000 139-06812-0000 139-07501-0000 139-08061-0000 139-02212-0000 139-05621-0000 139-01001-0000 139-05621-0000 139-03402-0000 139-04751-0000 139-02432-0000 139-05112-0000 139-03321-0000 139-03322-0000 139-04752-0000 139-01002-0000 139-02213-0000 139-04752-0000 139-03571-0000 139-02491-0000 139-08871-0000 139-02491-0000 139-03013-0000 139-01003-0000 139-03571-0000 139-04991-0000 139-02151-0000 139-01003-0000 139-01003-0000 139-01003-0000 139-02493-0000 139-06190-0000 139-06191-0000 139-01001-0000 139-04751-0000 139-05621-0000 139-07502-0000 139-01004-0000 139-05111-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04991-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01001-0000 130-05027-0043 130-05027-0043 139-01001-0000 RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES RES PF 102K QW 1% PF 102K QW 1% CH 2.21K EW 1% CH 511K EW 1% CHIP 40.2KEW1% CHIP 43.2KEW1% CH 1.37K EW 1% CHIP 3.32K EW CH 2.7 HW 5% CH 2.7 HW 5% CHIP 1K EW 1% CH 4.75K EW 1% CH 2.7 HW 5% CH 2.7 HW 5% 68.1K EW 1% CH 6.81K EW 1% 68.1K EW 1% CHIP 7.5KEW1% CH 8.06K EW 1% CHIP 22.1KEW1% CHIP 5.62KEW1% CHIP 1K EW 1% CHIP 5.62KEW1% CH 34K EW 1% CH 4.75K EW 1% CH 24.3K EW 1% CHIP 51.1K 1% CHIP 3.32K EW CH 33.2K EW 1% CH 47.5K EW 1% CHIP 10K EW 1% CH 221K EW 1% CH 47.5K EW 1% CHIP 3.57KEW1% CHIP 2.49KEW1% CH 8.87K EW 1% CHIP 2.49KEW1% CHIP 301K EW1% CHIP 100KEW1% CHIP 3.57KEW1% CHIP 4.99KEW1% CH 2.15K EW 1% CHIP 100KEW1% CHIP 100KEW1% CHIP 100KEW1% CH 249K EW 1% CH 619 EW 1% CH 6.19KEW 1% CHIP 1K EW 1% CH 4.75K EW 1% CHIP 5.62KEW1% CHIP 75KEW1% CHIP 1M EW 1% CHIP 5.11KEW1% CHIP 10K EW 1% CHIP 10K EW 1% CHIP 4.99KEW1% CHIP 10K EW 1% CHIP 10K EW 1% CHIP 1K EW 1% CH 2.7 HW 5% CH 2.7 HW 5% CHIP 1K EW 1% EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Page 10028 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
R4142 R4143 R4158 R4161 R4162 R4163 R4164 R4165 R4166 R4169 R4170 R4173 R4175 R4176 R4178 R4180 R4181 R4182 R4183 R4185 R4186 R4187 R4188 R4189 R4190 R4191 R4192 R4195 R4196 R4197 R4198 R4199 R4200 R4201 R4202 R4203 R4204 R4205 R4206 R4207 R4208 R4209 R4210 R4211 R4212 R4213 R4214 R4215 R4216 R4219 R4220 R4221 R4222 R4223 R4224 R4225 R4226 R4227 R4228 R4229 R4230 R4231 R4232 130-05027-0043 130-05027-0043 139-04750-0000 139-01001-0000 130-05027-0043 130-05027-0043 130-05027-0043 130-05027-0043 139-01001-0000 139-04991-0000 139-07321-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01001-0000 134-01015-0031 139-02102-0000 139-05761-0000 139-01003-0000 139-02433-0000 139-04751-0000 139-04750-0000 139-01021-0000 132-05051-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01001-0000 139-04641-0000 139-01001-0000 133-00562-2202 139-03571-0000 139-02871-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04751-0000 139-01001-0000 139-06491-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01302-0000 139-03321-0000 139-02670-0000 139-01002-0000 139-02001-0000 139-01241-0000 139-04641-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04751-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01001-0000 139-08060-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01001-0000 139-02001-0000 139-04991-0000 139-07681-0000 139-04752-0000 139-04991-0000 139-01002-0000 139-02210-0000 139-04751-0000 RES CH 2.7 HW 5% RES CH 2.7 HW 5% RES CH 475 EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CH 2.7 HW 5% RES CH 2.7 HW 5% RES CH 2.7 HW 5% RES CH 2.7 HW 5% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% RES CH 7.32K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% THMS 2700 10% RES CHIP 21K EW 1% RES CH 5.76K EW 1% RES CHIP 100KEW1% RES CH 243K EW 1% RES CH 4.75K EW 1% RES CH 475 EW 1% RES CH 1.02K EW 1% RES WW .15 2W 5% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CH 4.64K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES VAR 12-15T 2K RES CHIP 3.57KEW1% RES CH 2.87K EW 1% RES CHIP 10K EW 1% RES CH 4.75K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CH 6.49K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CH 13K EW 1% RES CHIP 3.32K EW RES 267 EW 1% RES CHIP 10K EW 1% RES CHIP 2K EW 1% RES CHIP 1.24KEW1% RES CH 4.64K EW 1% RES CHIP 10K EW 1% RES CHIP 10K EW 1% RES CH 4.75K EW 1% RES CHIP 10K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CH 806 EW 1% RES CHIP 10K EW 1% RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CHIP 2K EW 1% RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% RES CH 7.68K EW 1% RES CH 47.5K EW 1% RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% RES CHIP 10K EW 1% RES CH 221 EW 1% RES CH 4.75K EW 1% EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

34-40-11

Page 10029 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
R4233 R4234 R4235 REF1 REF2 T4001 T4002 T4005 TP4001 TP4002 TP4004 TP4007 TP4008 TP4009 TP4010 TP4011 TP4014 TP4015 TP4016 TP4017 TP4020 TP4021 U4001 U4002 U4003 U4005 U4006 U4008 U4010 U4011 U4012 U4013 U4014 U4015 U4017 U4018 U4019 U4020 U4033 U4034 U4049 U4050 U4054 U4058 U4059 U4060 U4061 Y4001 139-01001-0000 139-03922-0000 136-01023-0072 300-08548-0020 002-08548-0020 019-07255-0000 019-06133-0000 019-07257-0000 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 120-03430-0000 120-03163-0001 120-02233-0003 120-03510-0000 120-03510-0000 124-00074-0003 122-30064-9999 120-02469-0001 120-03163-0001 120-03592-0000 120-03520-0000 120-03520-0000 137-00034-0000 120-03196-0000 120-03544-0000 120-00108-0002 120-03569-0000 120-03569-0000 120-03569-0000 120-03569-0000 124-00000-0003 120-00108-0002 120-03167-0004 120-03593-0000 120-03174-0014 044-00309-0005 009-08548-0020 012-01316-0000 012-01575-0000 012-01673-0001 016-01040-0000 016-01082-0000 016-01442-0000 047-10675-0001 047-10676-0001 057-01540-0000 057-03231-0004 089-02140-0000 089-05903-0003 089-05903-0004 089-05903-0006 RES CHIP 1K EW 1% RES CH 39.2K EW 1% RES PF 102K QW 1% POWER SUPPLY HIGH VOLTAGE P.S. FLYBACK TRANS PULSE TRANSFORMER XFMR, POWER TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT TERMINAL TEST PNT IC 2843 LM2901 SO-14 COMP IC DUAL DRIVER SMD PWR SWTCHG REGULTR PWR SWTCHG REGULTR IC 74HCT74 SO PKG PLACE HOLDER 3042 GATE ARRAY LM2901 SO-14 COMP IC DIA MAX506BEWP OVER VOLTAGE SENSE OVER VOLTAGE SENSE LM35D TEMP SEMSOR IC LM2902D VOLT REF LM285-2.5 IC 74LS221 SO L6203 DMOS F-B DVR L6203 DMOS F-B DVR L6203 DMOS F-B DVR L6203 DMOS F-B DVR IC 74HCT00 SO PKG IC 74LS221 SO LM318 QUAD SW DG442 OP AMP BI FET SO 1.025MHZ OSC SMT PCBD POWE SUPPLY/M INSUL POLY FOAM INSUL PS BD INSULATOR COATING TYPE AR DC RTV 3145 E-6000 CLEAR SEALA HTSNK MOTOR W/F HEARTSINK W/F WARNING HV TAG BDX-26147-0004 NUT LOCK 4-40 SCR PHP 4-40X3/16 SCR PHP 4-40X1/4 SCR PHP 4-40X3/8 EA RF EA RF RF EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA RF EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA AR AR AR EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 5 1

Page 10030 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
089-05907-0006 090-00973-0003 090-00973-0005 091-00054-0003 091-00286-0002 091-00480-0071 091-00602-0000 092-05003-0018 126-00074-0000 SCR PHP 6-32X3/8 PIN SNAP LOCK .375 PIN SNAP LOCK .625 WASHER INSUL .500 INSUL XSTR .687 FLG BUSHING .116 ( WSHR INSUL EYE ROLL .121X.250 MICROSTEPING ROM EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA 2 3 1 3 2 2 2 2 1

34-40-11

Page 10031 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10032 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08549-0000 R-10

Logic Board Figure 4 (Sheet 1 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 10033 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08549-0000 R-10

Logic Board Figure 4 (Sheet 2 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 10035 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08549-0000 R-10

Logic Board Figure 4 (Sheet 3 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 10037 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08549-0000 R-10

Logic Board Figure 4 (Sheet 4 of 4)

34-40-11

Page 10039 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 200-08549-0000 Desrciption LOGIC BOARD Rev. 1

SYMBOL C5001 C5002 C5003 C5004 C5005 C5006 C5007 C5008 C5009 C5010 C5011 C5012 C5013 C5014 C5015 C5016 C5017 C5018 C5019 C5020 C5021 C5022 C5023 C5024 C5025 C5026 C5027 C5028 C5029 C5030 C5031 C5032 C5033 C5034 C5035 C5036 C5037

PART_NUMBER 096-01186-0027 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 096-01186-0012 096-01186-0011 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 096-01186-0012 106-04330-0026 106-04330-0026 106-04330-0026 106-04330-0026 106-04101-0026 106-04101-0026 106-04101-0026 106-04101-0026 106-04101-0026 106-04101-0026 106-04101-0026 106-04101-0026 106-04101-0026 106-04101-0026 106-04101-0026 106-04103-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 096-01186-0020 096-01186-0020

FIND_NO DESCRIPTION

UN

-0020 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

-------- --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------CAP .33UF 35V 10% EA CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP 47UF 10V 10% CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CH 33PF NPO/100V CH 33PF NPO/100V CH 33PF NPO/100V CH 33PF NPO/100V EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA

CAP 1.0UF 16V 10% EA

CAP 1.0UF 16V 10% EA

CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CAP CH 10K X7R/50V EA CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA

CAP .47UF 25V 10% EA CAP .47UF 25V 10% EA

34-40-11

Page 10041 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
C5038 C5039 C5041 C5042 C5043 C5044 C5045 C5046 C5047 C5048 C5049 C5050 C5051 C5052 C5053 C5054 C5056 C5057 C5058 C5059 C5061 C5062 C5063 C5064 C5065 C5069 C5070 C5071 C5073 C5074 C5076 C5078 C5079 C5080 C5081 C5082 C5083 C5084 C5085 C5086 C5087 106-04102-0046 106-04103-0046 096-01186-0020 106-04102-0046 096-01186-0059 106-04180-0026 096-01186-0020 106-00122-0000 096-01186-0020 106-04102-0046 106-04102-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04102-0046 106-04102-0046 106-04102-0046 106-04102-0046 096-01186-0020 106-04103-0046 096-01186-0059 096-01186-0020 106-00122-0000 106-04103-0046 096-01186-0059 106-04101-0026 106-04104-0046 096-01186-0027 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 096-01186-0020 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 CAP CH 1K 50V 5% EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CAP CH 10K X7R/50V EA CAP .47UF 25V 10% EA CAP CH 1K 50V 5% EA CAP 4.7UF 10V 20% EA CAP CH18PFNPO/100V EA CAP .47UF 25V 10% EA CH CAP .33UF 50V CAP CH 1K 50V 5% CAP CH 1K 50V 5% CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH 1K 50V 5% CAP CH 1K 50V 5% CAP CH 1K 50V 5% CAP CH 1K 50V 5% EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA CAP .47UF 25V 10% EA

CAP .47UF 25V 10% EA CAP CH 10K X7R/50V EA CAP 4.7UF 10V 20% EA CAP .47UF 25V 10% EA CH CAP .33UF 50V EA CAP CH 10K X7R/50V EA CAP 4.7UF 10V 20% EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA CAP .33UF 35V 10% EA

CAP .47UF 25V 10% EA

Page 10042 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
C5088 C5089 C5090 C5091 C5093 C5094 C5095 C5096 C5097 C5098 C5099 C5100 C5101 C5102 C5103 C5104 C5105 C5106 C5107 C5108 C5109 C5110 C5111 C5112 C5113 C5114 C5115 C5116 C5117 C5118 C5119 C5120 C5121 C5122 C5123 C5124 C5125 C5126 C5127 C5128 C5129 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 096-01186-0059 106-04104-0046 106-04103-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CAP 4.7UF 10V 20% EA CAP CH 10K X7R/50V EA

34-40-11

Page 10043 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
C5130 C5131 C5132 C5133 C5134 C5135 C5136 C5137 C5138 C5139 C5140 C5141 C5142 C5145 C5146 C5147 C5148 C5149 C5150 C5151 C5152 C5153 C5154 C5155 C5156 C5158 C5160 C5161 C5163 C5164 C5165 C5501 C5502 C5503 C5504 C5505 C5506 C5507 C5508 C5509 C5510 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-04104-0046 106-00124-0000 106-00124-0000 096-01186-0027 106-04101-0026 106-04100-0016 106-00126-0012 106-00126-0007 106-00126-0003 106-00126-0010 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05101-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05470-0016 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CAP CH CR .15 500V EA CAP CH CR .15 500V EA CAP .33UF 35V 10% EA CH 100PF NPO/100V EA CH 10PF NPO/50V EA CH MCRWV NPO 24PF EA CH MCRWV NPO 0.8PF EA CH MCRWV NPO 51PF EA CH MCRWV NPO 100PF EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH100PFNPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 47PFNPO/50V EA

Page 10044 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
C5511 C5512 C5513 C5514 C5515 C5516 C5517 C5518 C5519 C5520 C5521 C5523 C5524 C5525 C5526 C5527 C5528 C5529 C5530 C5531 C5532 C5533 C5534 C5535 C5536 C5537 C5538 C5539 C5540 C5541 C5542 C5543 C5544 C5545 C5551 C5567 C5568 C5572 C5574 C5575 C5576 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05470-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05680-0016 106-05102-0016 096-01186-0064 106-05102-0016 106-05103-0046 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05103-0046 106-05102-0016 106-00126-0004 106-00133-0001 106-00133-0001 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05270-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05270-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-00126-0005 106-00133-0001 106-05121-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05200-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05101-0016 106-05101-0016 106-00133-0005 CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 47PFNPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 68PFNPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP 10UF 16V 20% EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 10K X7R/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 10K X7R/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CH MCRWV NPO 1KPF EA CAP CH 33PF N330 CAP CH 33PF N330 EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 27PFNPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 27PFNPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CH MCRWV NPO 30PF EA CAP CH 33PF N330 EA CAP CH120PFNPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAPCH 20PF NPO 50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH100PFNPO/50V EA CAP CH100PFNPO/50V EA CAP CH 33PF N220 EA

34-40-11

Page 10045 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
C5577 C5578 C5584 C5587 C5588 C5589 CJ5001 CJ5002 CJ5003 CJ5004 CJ5005 CR5002 CR5003 CR5004 CR5005 CR5006 CR5007 CR5008 CR5009 CR5010 CR5011 CR5012 CR5013 CR5014 CR5015 CR5016 CR5017 CR5018 CR5019 CR5020 CR5021 CR5022 FL5001 J5001 J5002 J5004 J5005 J5006 J5502 L5001 L5002 106-05104-0037 106-05104-0037 106-05271-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 106-05102-0016 130-05000-0035 130-05000-0035 130-05000-0035 130-05000-0035 130-05000-0035 007-06184-0000 007-06184-0000 007-06184-0000 007-06396-0000 007-06396-0000 007-06396-0000 007-06179-0000 007-06396-0000 007-06396-0000 007-06184-0000 007-06396-0000 007-06181-0000 007-06184-0000 120-03599-0000 007-06448-0000 007-05241-0007 007-05241-0007 007-06184-0000 007-05241-0007 007-06184-0000 007-06184-0000 017-00251-0001 030-03252-0008 155-02745-0000 030-03171-0003 030-03209-0003 030-03209-0003 030-00464-0000 013-00186-0000 013-00186-0000 CAP CH 100KX7R/25V EA CAP CH 100KX7R/25V EA CAP CH270PFNPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA CAP CH 1K NPO/50V EA RES CH 0 QW CJ RES CH 0 QW CJ RES CH 0 QW CJ RES CH 0 QW CJ RES CH 0 QW CJ EA EA EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

DIO DUAL SWITCHING EA DIO DUAL SWITCHING EA DIO DUAL SWITCHING EA DIO SW DUAL DIO SW DUAL DIO SW DUAL DIO SI MMBD501 DIO SW DUAL DIO SW DUAL DIO SW DUAL EA EA EA EA EA EA EA

DIO DUAL SWITCHING EA DIO DUAL MMBD2835 EA DIO DUAL SWITCHING EA SP720 ESD ARRAY TRNSRB 1500W 7V TRNSRB 1500W 7V TRNSRB 1500W 7V EA EA EA EA DIO SCHTKY 1A 30V EA

DIO DUAL SWITCHING EA DIO DUAL SWITCHING EA DIO DUAL SWITCHING EA RFI/EMI SUPP FIL EA CONN, PLG, D-SUB, EA CABLE RIBBON (40P) EA CONN HDR RTANG 6P EA CONN HEADER CONN HEADER CONN COAX PC STR FERR CHOKE Z-MAX FERR CHOKE Z-MAX EA EA EA EA EA

Page 10046 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
L5004 L5005 L5006 L5008 L5014 L5016 L5017 L5018 L5019 L5501 L5502 L5504 L5505 L5506 L5507 L5523 L5524 L5525 L5526 L5527 L5534 L5536 L5537 L5538 L5539 Q5001 Q5002 Q5003 Q5004 Q5005 Q5006 Q5007 Q5008 Q5009 Q5010 Q5011 Q5012 Q5013 Q5014 Q5015 Q5016 013-00181-0000 013-00181-0000 013-00181-0000 013-00181-0000 013-00181-0000 013-00172-0000 013-00172-0000 013-00181-0000 013-00181-0000 019-02314-0090 019-02314-0090 019-02660-0040 019-02660-0040 019-02660-0013 019-02660-0040 019-02660-0040 019-02314-0091 019-02660-0040 019-02660-0040 019-02660-0040 019-02660-0040 019-02660-0050 019-02660-0015 019-02660-0015 019-02660-0017 007-00065-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00065-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00065-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00065-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00065-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00065-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00065-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00065-0001 007-00179-0001 FERRITE CHIP IND FERRITE CHIP IND FERRITE CHIP IND FERRITE CHIP IND FERRITE CHIP IND EA EA EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

FERRITE BEAD, SURF EA FERRITE BEAD, SURF EA FERRITE CHIP IND FERRITE CHIP IND IDCTR V 4.5T IDCTR V 4.5T IND SM 10000 10% IND SM 10000 10% IND SM 100 10% IND SM 10000 10% IND SM 10000 10% IDCTR V 4.5T IND SM 10000 10% IND SM 10000 10% IND SM 10000 10% IND SM 10000 10% IND SM 82 10% IND SM 150 10% IND SM 150 10% IND SM 220 10% EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA

XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA

34-40-11

Page 10047 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Q5017 Q5018 Q5019 Q5020 Q5021 Q5022 Q5023 Q5024 Q5501 Q5502 Q5503 R5001 R5002 R5003 R5006 R5007 R5008 R5009 R5010 R5011 R5012 R5013 R5014 R5015 R5016 R5017 R5018 R5019 R5020 R5021 R5022 R5023 R5024 R5025 R5026 R5028 R5029 R5030 R5031 R5032 R5033 007-00065-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00065-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00065-0001 007-00179-0001 007-00065-0001 007-00537-0000 007-00537-0000 007-00933-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04750-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04991-0000 139-04750-0000 139-02002-0000 015-00207-0032 139-01002-0000 139-04750-0000 139-02002-0000 139-02431-0000 139-02002-0000 139-08061-0000 015-00249-0000 015-00249-0000 139-03091-0000 139-01501-0000 139-01501-0000 139-02002-0000 139-02431-0000 139-02002-0000 139-08061-0000 139-03013-0000 139-01003-0000 139-03323-0000 139-03242-0000 139-04992-0000 139-01002-0000 XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR SOT23 2N3904 EA XSTR 2N3906 (SOT) EA XSTR PNP MMBT5087 EA XSTR PNP MMBT5087 EA MMBT2369 EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 475 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% EA RES CH 475 EW 1% RES OCTAL 10K SO RES CH 475 EW 1% EA EA EA RES CHIP 20.0KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 20.0KEW1% EA RES CH 2.43K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 20.0KEW1% EA RES CH 8.06K EW 1% EA RES NETWORK RES NETWORK EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

RES CH 3.09K EW 1% EA RES CH 1.5K EW 1% EA RES CH 1.5K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 20.0KEW1% EA RES CH 2.43K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 20.0KEW1% EA RES CH 8.06K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 100KEW1% EA RES CH 332K EW 1% EA RES CH 32.4K EW 1% EA RES CH 49.9K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA

Page 10048 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
R5035 R5037 R5038 R5039 R5040 R5041 R5042 R5043 R5044 R5045 R5046 R5047 R5048 R5049 R5051 R5052 R5053 R5054 R5055 R5056 R5057 R5058 R5059 R5060 R5061 R5062 R5063 R5064 R5065 R5066 R5067 R5068 R5069 R5070 R5071 R5072 R5073 R5074 R5075 R5076 R5077 139-03010-0000 015-00248-0000 139-01001-0000 139-00309-0000 139-00309-0000 139-01001-0000 139-02212-0000 139-02212-0000 139-02211-0000 139-01501-0000 139-01212-0000 139-01212-0000 139-01501-0000 139-02211-0000 139-04750-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04752-0000 139-04752-0000 139-04752-0000 139-04752-0000 139-01023-0000 139-02553-0000 139-01501-0000 139-04321-0000 139-04222-0000 139-05761-0000 139-02002-0000 139-01371-0000 139-01372-0000 139-02002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04321-0000 139-04750-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04750-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01053-0000 139-01213-0000 139-04991-0000 RES CHIP 301 EW 1% EA RES NETWORK EA RES CHIP 1K EW 1% EA RES CH 30.9 EW 1% EA RES CH 30.9 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 22.1KEW1% EA RES CHIP 22.1KEW1% EA RES CH 2.21K EW 1% EA RES CH 1.5K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 12.1K1%EW EA RES CHIP 12.1K1%EW EA RES CH 1.5K EW 1% EA RES CH 2.21K EW 1% EA RES CH 475 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 47.5K EW 1% EA RES CH 47.5K EW 1% EA RES CH 47.5K EW 1% EA RES CH 47.5K EW 1% EA RES 102K EW 1% EA RES CH 255K EW 1% EA RES CH 1.5K EW 1% EA RES CH 4.32K EW 1% EA RES CH 42.2K EW 1% EA RES CH 5.76K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 20.0KEW1% EA RES CH 1.37K EW 1% EA RES 13.7K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 20.0KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 4.32K EW 1% EA RES CH 475 EW 1% RES CH 475 EW 1% EA EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 105K EW 1 EA RES CH 121K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

34-40-11

Page 10049 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
R5078 R5079 R5080 R5081 R5082 R5083 R5084 R5085 R5086 R5087 R5088 R5089 R5090 R5091 R5092 R5093 R5094 R5095 R5096 R5097 R5098 R5099 R5100 R5101 R5102 R5103 R5104 R5105 R5106 R5107 R5108 R5111 R5112 R5113 R5114 R5115 R5116 R5119 R5120 R5121 R5122 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04991-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01502-0000 139-01002-0000 139-05761-0000 139-04752-0000 139-04991-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-07682-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01004-0000 139-02002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-06811-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01004-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04991-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-05112-0000 139-04991-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-06811-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01004-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04750-0000 139-04750-0000 139-04750-0000 139-04750-0000 RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 15K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 5.76K EW 1% EA RES CH 47.5K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 76.8K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1M EW 1% EA RES CHIP 20.0KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 6.81K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1M EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 51.1K 1% EA RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 6.81K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1M EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 475 EW 1% RES CH 475 EW 1% RES CH 475 EW 1% RES CH 475 EW 1% EA EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Page 10050 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
R5123 R5125 R5126 R5127 R5128 R5130 R5131 R5132 R5133 R5137 R5138 R5139 R5140 R5141 R5150 R5151 R5152 R5153 R5155 R5157 R5158 R5159 R5160 R5165 R5166 R5167 R5168 R5170 R5171 R5172 R5173 R5174 R5175 R5176 R5177 R5178 R5179 R5180 R5181 R5182 R5183 139-01002-0000 139-03010-0000 139-02001-0000 139-02212-0000 139-01002-0000 130-05047-0033 130-05047-0033 139-08662-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01001-0000 139-04751-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01541-0000 139-01071-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04991-0000 139-02670-0000 139-09090-0000 139-00100-0000 139-01002-0000 139-03012-0000 139-04991-0000 139-08872-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01001-0000 139-01002-0000 139-03013-0000 139-07502-0000 139-01002-0000 139-03013-0000 139-07502-0000 139-01002-0000 139-03013-0000 139-07502-0000 139-01002-0000 139-03013-0000 139-07502-0000 RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 2K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 22.1KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 4.7 QW 5% RES CH 4.7 QW 5% EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

RES CH 86.6K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1K EW 1% EA RES CH 4.75K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1K EW 1% EA RES CH 1.54K EW 1% EA RES CH 1.07K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% EA RES 267 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 909 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 30.1KEW1% EA RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% EA RES CH 88.7K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 1K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 75KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 75KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 75KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 75KEW1% EA

34-40-11

Page 10051 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
R5184 R5185 R5186 R5187 R5188 R5189 R5190 R5191 R5192 R5195 R5210 R5221 R5222 R5223 R5224 R5225 R5226 R5227 R5228 R5229 R5230 R5231 R5232 R5233 R5234 R5247 R5249 R5250 R5258 R5259 R5260 R5262 R5263 R5264 R5265 R5266 R5267 R5268 R5269 R5270 R5271 139-01002-0000 139-03013-0000 139-07502-0000 139-01002-0000 139-03013-0000 139-07502-0000 139-01002-0000 139-03013-0000 139-07502-0000 139-07502-0000 139-01000-0000 139-07502-0000 139-05621-0000 139-07501-0000 139-05230-0000 139-03241-0000 139-04991-0000 139-05622-0000 139-05622-0000 139-05622-0000 139-05622-0000 139-05622-0000 139-05622-0000 139-05622-0000 139-05622-0000 139-07501-0000 139-01002-0000 139-03012-0000 139-01002-0000 139-02372-0000 139-01822-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-03013-0000 139-07502-0000 139-01002-0000 139-03013-0000 139-07502-0000 139-01002-0000 139-03013-0000 139-07502-0000 RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 75KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 75KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 75KEW1% RES CHIP 75KEW1% RES CHIP 75KEW1% EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

RES CHIP 100 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 5.62KEW1% EA RES CHIP 7.5KEW1% EA RES CH 523 EW 1% EA RES CH 3.24K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% EA RES CH 56.2K EW 1% EA RES CH 56.2K EW 1% EA RES CH 56.2K EW 1% EA RES CH 56.2K EW 1% EA RES CH 56.2K EW 1% EA RES CH 56.2K EW 1% EA RES CH 56.2K EW 1% EA RES CH 56.2K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 7.5KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 30.1KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES PF 23.7K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 18.2KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 75KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 75KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 75KEW1% EA

Page 10052 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
R5272 R5273 R5274 R5275 R5276 R5278 R5279 R5280 R5281 R5282 R5283 R5284 R5285 R5289 R5290 R5291 R5292 R5294 R5295 R5296 R5297 R5299 R5501 R5502 R5503 R5505 R5506 R5507 R5508 R5509 R5510 R5511 R5512 R5514 R5525 R5527 R5529 R5530 R5531 R5532 R5533 139-01002-0000 139-03013-0000 139-07502-0000 139-03922-0000 139-04750-0000 139-04750-0000 139-04750-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-02742-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01003-0000 139-01622-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04750-0000 139-04750-0000 139-04750-0000 139-01001-0000 139-02000-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-04991-0000 139-02742-0000 139-01822-0000 139-02742-0000 139-01822-0000 139-02742-0000 139-04752-0000 139-00750-0000 139-07870-0000 139-01271-0000 130-05561-0043 130-05561-0043 139-01002-0000 139-03922-0000 139-03922-0000 139-01000-0000 139-01000-0000 139-07151-0000 139-02801-0000 139-00100-0000 RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 301K EW1% EA RES CHIP 75KEW1% RES CH 475 EW 1% RES CH 475 EW 1% RES CH 475 EW 1% EA EA EA EA RES CH 39.2K EW 1% EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 27.4KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 100KEW1% EA RES CH 16.2K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 475 EW 1% RES CH 475 EW 1% RES CH 475 EW 1% RES CH 200 EW 1% EA EA EA EA

RES CHIP 1K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 4.99KEW1% EA RES CHIP 27.4KEW1% EA RES CHIP 18.2KEW1% EA RES CHIP 27.4KEW1% EA RES CHIP 18.2KEW1% EA RES CHIP 27.4KEW1% EA RES CH 47.5K EW 1% EA RES CH 75.0 EW 1% EA RES CH 787 EW 1% RES CH 560 HW 5% RES CH 560 HW 5% EA EA EA RES CH 1.27K EW 1% EA

RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 39.2K EW 1% EA RES CH 39.2K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 100 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 100 EW 1% EA RES CH 7.15K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 2.8KEW1% EA RES CHIP 10 EW 1% EA

34-40-11

Page 10053 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
R5534 R5535 R5536 R5537 R5538 R5539 R5540 R5541 R5544 R5548 R5550 R5551 R5552 R5555 R5556 R5557 R5558 R5559 R5560 REF1 REF2 SK5003 SW5001 T5501 T5502 TP5001 TP5002 TP5003 TP5004 TP5005 TP5006 TP5007 TP5008 TP5010 TP5011 TP5012 TP5013 TP5015 TP5018 TP5019 TP5020 139-05111-0000 139-04751-0000 139-04751-0000 139-04751-0000 139-01332-0000 139-07500-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-00442-0000 139-00100-0000 139-00200-0000 139-01000-0000 139-01212-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-01002-0000 139-00499-0000 300-08549-0020 002-08549-0020 033-00224-0003 031-00756-0006 019-08265-0002 019-08265-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 RES CHIP 5.11KEW1% EA RES CH 4.75K EW 1% EA RES CH 4.75K EW 1% EA RES CH 4.75K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 13.3KEW1% EA RES CHIP 750 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 44.2 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10 EW 1% EA RES CH 20.0 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 100 EW 1% EA RES CHIP 12.1K1%EW EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CHIP 10K EW 1% EA RES CH 49.9 EW 1% EA ART 2100 LOGIC BD RF SCH ART 2100 LOGIC RF SKT PLCC SM 32 PIN EA SWITCH DIP 8 POS XFMR IF 63MHZ XFMR IF 63MHZ EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA

Page 10054 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
TP5022 TP5023 TP5024 TP5025 TP5027 TP5031 TP5032 U5001 U5002 U5003 U5004 U5005 U5006 U5007 U5008 U5009 U5010 U5011 U5012 U5013 U5014 U5015 U5016 U5017 U5018 U5019 U5020 U5021 U5022 U5023 U5024 U5025 U5026 U5027 U5028 U5029 U5030 U5031 U5032 U5033 U5034 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 008-00096-0001 120-02213-0002 120-02452-0000 122-99999-9999 120-02363-0009 120-02494-0000 123-00573-0003 124-00573-0003 124-00574-0003 124-00574-0003 124-00574-0003 124-00574-0003 120-02469-0001 122-30049-9999 124-00245-0002 124-00245-0002 124-00245-0002 124-00573-0003 124-00008-0003 124-00573-0003 124-00139-1003 120-03174-0014 123-04351-0003 123-04351-0003 120-03475-0003 124-00157-0003 120-03174-0013 120-03592-0000 120-03174-0014 124-00245-0002 120-03285-0002 120-03174-0014 120-03026-0080 120-03163-0001 120-03174-0014 TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA TERMINAL TEST PNT EA Z80 10MHZ PLCC PLACE HOLDER EA RF RESET/WTCHDG CNTL EA 32KX8 RAM 35NS SO EA X20C16 NOVRAM PLCC EA IC 74HC573 S01C 74HCT573 (SO) IC 74HCT574 IC 74HCT574 IC 74HCT574 IC 74HCT574 3042 GATE ARRAY 74HCT245D SO PKG 74HCT245D SO PKG 74HCT245D SO PKG 74HCT573 (SO) 74HCT573 (SO) 74ACT139 OP AMP BI FET SO EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ART 2100 FPGA ROM RF

IC 74HCT08 SO PKG EA

74HC4351 MUXIDEMUX EA 74HC4351 MUXIDEMUX EA ADC0820 8BITA/D SO EA IC 74HCT157 SO PKG EA OP AMP BI FET SO OP AMP BI FET SO 74HCT245D SO PKG OP AMP BI FET SO EA EA EA EA IC DIA MAX506BEWP EA

A/D CONVERT CA3306 EA 78M05 DPAK VLT REG EA LM2901 SO-14 COMP EA OP AMP BI FET SO EA

34-40-11

Page 10055 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
U5035 U5036 U5037 U5038 U5039 U5040 U5041 U5042 U5043 U5048 U5057 U5059 U5091 U5118 U5119 U5122 U5125 U5126 U5144 U5159 U5160 U5162 U5163 U5165 U5166 U5168 U5169 U5171 U5501 U5502 U5503 U5504 U5505 U5506 U5507 V5001 Y5001 Y5002 120-03174-0014 120-03598-0000 120-02469-0001 122-30048-9999 120-02363-0009 120-03026-0082 120-02469-0001 120-03126-0005 123-00573-0003 120-02233-0003 120-02469-0001 120-02363-0009 120-08030-0010 120-02363-0009 120-03488-0000 120-03174-0013 123-00003-0003 124-00245-0002 120-03053-0010 120-03174-0014 120-03174-0014 120-03393-0002 120-03593-0000 120-06065-0002 124-00574-0003 124-00574-0003 124-00574-0003 120-03400-0001 120-03020-0001 120-03020-0001 120-03501-0000 120-03020-0001 120-03020-0001 120-03027-0004 120-03174-0013 134-02001-0000 044-00309-0003 044-00309-0006 009-08549-0020 012-01361-0002 016-01040-0000 OP AMP BI FET SO HI5700 8BIT A/D 3042 GATE ARRAY ART 2100 WX COMP EA EA EA RF 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 EA EA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 1

32KX8 RAM 35NS SO EA 78M08 DPAK VLT REG EA 3042 GATE ARRAY LM317L IC 74HC573 S01C 3042 GATE ARRAY EA EA

IC DUAL DRIVER SMD EA 32KX8 RAM 35NS SO EA 429 ARINC LSI, 2 EA 32KX8 RAM 35NS SO EA PM7224FS DAC OP AMP BI FET SO IC 74HC03 SOIC 74HCT245D SO PKG IC LM2904 SO PKG OP AMP BI FET SO OP AMP BI FET SO QUAD SW DG442 IC 74HCT574 IC 74HCT574 IC 74HCT574 IC IF AMP SO IC IF AMP SO IC IF AMP SO IC IF AMP SO OP AMP BI FET SO VARISTOR 82V 10 MHZ CLK OSC 41.4 OSC TAPE LACING COATING TYPE AR EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA IN AR

QUAD SWITCH DG441 EA DAC 10BIT .1%(SO) EA

REF-02 PREC V REG EA

HIGH SPEED DP-AMP EA

BALANCED MOD/DEMOD EA

PCBD ART 2100 LOGI EA

Page 10056 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
030-02352-0007 047-05201-0001 047-10012-0001 047-10013-0001 047-10014-0001 057-03231-0004 076-02894-0001 089-05878-0004 089-05903-0004 090-00988-0000 090-01019-0020 126-00047-0004 126-00059-0003 LOCKING TAB BRACKET W/F I/F FENCE I/F FENCE I/F FENCE W/F BDX-26147-0004 SPACER PCB .120 SCR PHP 4-40X1/4 SCR PHP 4-40X1/4 FINGER STOCK EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA 1 2 1 1 1 1 9 2 2 1 2 1 1

TWIST LOK CBL CLIP EA ART 2000/2100 FPGA EA ART 2000 WXCOMP RO EA

34-40-11

Page 10057 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10058 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-05174-0000 R-3

Scan Motor Assembly Figure 5

34-40-11

Page 10059 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 200-05174-0000 SYMBOL -------B1 P2 REF1 Desrciption AZIMUTH MOTOR ASSY Rev. 1

PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0000 --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------148-05182-0001 MOTOR W/SHFT MOD EA 1 030-02204-0002 CONN HSG 6 CAV EA 1 300-05174-0000 AZIMUTH MOTOR ASSY RF 0 008-00300-0004 TERMINAL LUG EA 1 016-01160-0000 ADH SPBNDR #326 AR 1 024-05004-0002 WIRE TC SHD FLAT IN 9 025-00024-0000 WIRE 22AWG BLK IN 3 030-01058-0001 CONN, PLUG, KEYING EA 1 030-02205-0005 TERM 22-26 EA 5 047-10162-0002 FEEDTHRU W/FERRULE EA 1 076-02823-0000 DAMPER EA 1 089-05857-0006 SCR SET 4-40X3/16 EA 1 091-00109-0000 CABLE TIE EA 2 150-00042-0000 TUBING SHRINK .187 IN 3.5 150-00049-0010 TUBING SHRINK WHT IN .5 150-00072-0000 SLDR SLEEVE .62 EA 2 150-00098-0016 INSUL TUBING 6D IN 4.75

34-40-11

Page 10061 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10062 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-05175-0000 R-AA

Gimbal Assembly figure 6 (Sheet 1 of 2)

34-40-11

Page 10063 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-05175-0000 R-AA

Gimbal Assembly Figure 6 (Sheet 2 of 2)

34-40-11

Page 10065 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 200-05175-0000 SYMBOL -------REF1 WG100 WG100 Desrciption GIMBAL ASSY Rev. 1

PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0020 --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------300-05175-0000 GIMBAL ASSY RF 0 015-00239-0002 LIMITER (X-BAND) EA .5 015-00313-0001 X-BAND LIMITER EA .5 008-00065-0000 SLDR LUG EA 1 012-01361-0002 TAPE LACING IN 8 012-01567-0000 TEFLON LINER EA 1 015-00250-0000 RF NETWORK EA 1 016-01007-0007 LOCTITE 47-56 PMR AR 1 016-01007-0010 LOCTITE 609 AR 1 016-01016-0000 MOLYKOTE G-N PASTE AR 1 016-01278-0007 LUBRICANT AR 1 029-00766-0002 GEAR TILT 48PTCH EA 1 029-00767-0001 GEAR SCAN W/FIN EA 1 029-00768-0001 CLUSTER GEAR W/F EA 1 047-09947-0001 MTG PLT TILT MTR EA 1 047-10683-0001 CLIP CABLE W/FIN EA 1 073-00969-0001 CAM POS FDBK W/F EA 1 076-02277-0000 PIVOT PIN EA 2 088-03123-0001 CABLE GUARD W/BRKT EA 1 088-03143-0000 GUIDE CABLE EA 1 088-03148-0000 SHROUD CABLE EA 1 089-05857-0006 SCR SET 4-40X3/16 EA 2 089-05878-0005 SCR PHP 4-40X5/16 EA 4 089-05878-0006 SCR PHP 4-40X3/8 EA 4 089-05907-0003 SCR PHP 6-32X3/16 EA 1 089-06492-0005 SCR SHC 4-40X5/16 EA 4 089-06493-0007 SCR SHC 6-32X7/16 EA 2 089-06494-0005 SCR SHC 8-32X5/16 EA 4 089-06494-0028 SCR SHC 8-32X1-3/4 EA 4 089-08110-0034 WSHR SPLT LK #6 EA 2 089-08339-0000 WASHER CURVED SPRG EA 1 089-08600-0000 SHIM .25.375T=.002 EA 1 089-08600-0002 SHIM .25.375T=.006 EA 1 089-08600-0004 SHIM .25.375T=.010 EA 1 089-08600-0007 SHIM .25.375T=.016 EA 1 090-00019-0002 RING RTNR .250 EA 2 091-00109-0003 CABLE TIE EA 7 147-05169-0010 BEARING FLNGD SHLD EA 2 147-05169-0012 BEARING FLNGD SHLD EA 2 200-05173-0000 PITCH MOTOR ASSY EA 1 200-05310-0000 MAGNETRON ASSY EA 1 200-05553-0001 RECEIVER ASSY EA 1 200-05554-0000 TILT SENSOR ASSY EA 1

34-40-11

Page 10067 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10068 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-05173-0000 R-5

Tilt Motor Assembly Figure 7

34-40-11

Page 10069 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 200-05173-0000 SYMBOL -------B1 P3 REF1 Desrciption PITCH MOTOR ASSY Rev. 1

PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0000 --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------148-05182-0001 MOTOR W/SHFT MOD EA 1 030-02204-0002 CONN HSG 6 CAV EA 1 300-05173-0000 PITCH MOTOR ASSY RF 0 008-00073-0000 TERM RING EA 1 016-01160-0000 ADH SPBNDR #326 AR 1 025-00024-0000 WIRE 22AWG BLK IN 3 025-05121-0000 CA SHLD 4 COND 24G IN 15.5 030-01058-0001 CONN, PLUG, KEYING EA 1 030-02205-0005 TERM 22-26 EA 5 047-10162-0002 FEEDTHRU W/FERRULE EA 1 076-02823-0000 DAMPER EA 1 089-05857-0006 SCR SET 4-40X3/16 EA 1 091-00109-0000 CABLE TIE EA 2 150-00018-0010 TUBING SHRINK WHT IN 2 150-00049-0010 TUBING SHRINK WHT IN .5 150-00072-0000 SLDR SLEEVE .62 EA 2 150-00096-0001 TUBING SHRINK 3/16 IN 1 150-00098-0016 INSUL TUBING 6D IN 4.75 150-00207-0000 CABLE SLEEVING IN 9.6

34-40-11

Page 10071 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10072 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-05310-0000 R-AA

Magnetron Assembly Figure 8

34-40-11

Page 10073 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 200-05310-0000 Desrciption MAGNETRON ASSY Rev. AA

SYMBOL PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0000 -------- --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------REF1 300-05310-0000 CABLE ASSY, MAGNET RF 0 008-00300-0004 TERMINAL LUG EA 1 021-00127-0000 MAGNETRON (X-BAND) EA .5 021-00127-0001 X-BAND MAGNETRON EA .5 024-05079-0000 BRAID SHIELDING IN 18.8 025-00024-0000 WIRE 22AWG BLK IN 4.7 076-02821-0001 TUBE WIRE W/FIN EA 2 150-00049-0010 TUBING SHRINK WHT IN .5 150-00072-0000 SLDR SLEEVE .62 EA 2 150-00096-0001 TUBING SHRINK 3/16 IN 2 150-00128-0004 TBG HT SHRNK YEL IN .5 150-00207-0000 CABLE SLEEVING IN 8.7 150-00207-0010 CABLE SLV WHT 1/8 IN 8.1

34-40-11

Page 10075 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10076 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-05553-0000 R-5

Receiver Assembly Figure 9

34-40-11

Page 10077 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 200-05553-0000 Desrciption RECEIVER ASSY Rev. 4

SYMBOL PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0001 -------- --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------REF1 300-05553-0001 RECEIVER ASSY RF 0 015-00238-0001 XBAND RADAR FR END EA 1 016-01007-0003 LOCTITE 73 STUD AR 1 026-00029-0000 WIRE, CU, 22AWG, T IN 4 047-09953-0001 COVER PREAMP W/FIN EA 1 073-00946-0002 PRE-AMP HOUSING EA 1 076-02817-0001 INSERT METRIC/UNC EA 4 076-02825-0000 SPACER THREADED EA 1 076-02825-0001 SPACER THREADED EA 1 089-05874-0003 SCR PHP 2-56X3/16 EA 2 089-05874-0004 SCR PHP 2-56X1/4 EA 3 089-05899-0008 SCR PHP 2-56X1/2 EA 1 089-08001-0034 WSHR SPLT LK #2 EA 2 150-00005-0010 TUBING TFLN 20AWG IN .4 155-02744-0001 CABLE ASSY PREAMP EA 1 187-01813-0000 GASKET EMI EA 1 187-01814-0000 GASKET EMI EA 1 187-01869-0001 ABSORBER, MICROWAV EA 1 200-08545-0020 PREAMP BD SRX24 EA 1

34-40-11

Page 10079 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10080 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-08545-0000 R-2

Preamp Board Figure 10

34-40-11

Page 10081 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 200-08545-0000 SYMBOL -------C1001 C1002 C1003 C1004 E1005 E1006 J1002 L1001 R1001 R1002 R1003 R1004 R1005 R1006 R1007 R1008 REF1 REF2 U1001 U1002 U1003 U1004 Desrciption PREAMP BOARD SRX23 Rev. 0

PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0020 --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------106-04104-0046 CAP CH.1UFX7R50V EA 1 106-04272-0016 CAPCH.0027MFNPO/50 EA 1 096-01186-0013 CAP CH 3.3UF 16V EA 1 106-04102-0046 CAP CH 1K 50V 5% EA 1 008-00310-0000 TERMINAL BIFURCATE EA 1 008-00311-0000 TERMINAL BIFURCATE EA 1 030-03171-0003 CONN HDR RTANG 6P EA 1 013-00181-0000 FERRITE CHIP IND EA 1 139-06491-0000 RES CH 6.49K EW 1% EA 1 139-02211-0000 RES CH 2.21K EW 1% EA 1 139-02051-0000 RES CH 2.05KEW 1% EA 1 139-02432-0000 RES CH 24.3K EW 1% EA 1 139-01003-0000 RES CHIP 100KEW1% EA 1 139-01003-0000 RES CHIP 100KEW1% EA 1 139-01003-0000 RES CHIP 100KEW1% EA 1 139-01003-0000 RES CHIP 100KEW1% EA 1 300-08545-0020 PREAMP BD ASSY RF 0 002-08545-0020 SCH PREAMP BD RF 0 120-03581-0000 MMIC INA02184 EA 1 137-00034-0000 LM35D TEMP SEMSOR EA 1 120-03053-0009 LM358D DUAL OP AMP EA 1 120-03544-0000 VOLT REF LM285-2.5 EA 1 009-08545-0020 PCBD PREAMP BD EA 1 016-01040-0000 COATING TYPE AR AR 1

34-40-11

Page 10083 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10084 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-05554-0000 R-5

Tilt Sensor Assembly Figure 11

34-40-11

Page 10085 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 200-05554-0000 SYMBOL -------P5 REF1 U100 Desrciption TILT SENSOR ASSY Rev. 2

PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0000 --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------030-03170-0003 CONN HSG, 2 ROW, 6 EA 1 300-05554-0000 TILT SENSOR ASSY RF 0 120-03584-0000 LINEAR HALL EFFECT EA 1 016-01040-0000 COATING TYPE AR AR 1 016-01160-0000 ADH SPBNDR #326 AR 1 016-01160-0001 ADHESIVE PRIMER N AR 1 016-01268-0000 LOCTITE 271 AR 1 025-05122-0000 CA SHLD 3 COND 26G IN 19 030-01444-0000 CONTACT EA 5 030-01453-0000 POLARIZING PLUG EA 1 047-10162-0002 FEEDTHRU W/FERRULE EA 1 047-10500-0001 COVER TLT SENS W/F EA 1 073-00968-0003 FOLL TILT W/HDWR EA 1 073-05176-0003 GIMBAL W/HDW EA 1 076-02890-0001 FERRULE TILT SENSR EA 1 089-02136-0000 NUT LOCK 2-56 EA 1 089-06004-0003 SCR FHP 2-56X3/16 EA 2 089-08076-0030 WSHR FLT STD .130 EA 1 089-08093-0030 WSHR FLT STD .094 EA 1 089-08335-0000 WSHR CURVED SPRING EA 1 150-00017-0010 TUBING SHRINK 24G IN 1.2 150-00020-0010 TUBING SHRINK 18G IN 7 150-00096-0001 TUBING SHRINK 3/16 IN 1.1 150-00207-0000 CABLE SLEEVING IN 9.8

34-40-11

Page 10087 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10088 June/2002

34-40-11

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

300-05313-0000 R-3

Scan Sensor Assembly Figure 12

34-40-11

Page 10089 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000
Assembly 200-05313-0000 SYMBOL -------P6 REF1 U100 Desrciption SCAN SENSOR ASSY Rev. 3

PART_NUMBER FIND_NO DESCRIPTION UN -0000 --------------- --------- ------------------ -- --------030-03170-0003 CONN HSG, 2 ROW, 6 EA 1 300-05313-0000 SENSOR MOD SCAN RF 0 120-03584-0000 LINEAR HALL EFFECT EA 1 016-01040-0000 COATING TYPE AR AR 1 016-01144-0000 TAK PAK ADV 122-92 AR 1 016-01144-0001 ACCELERATOR 11525 AR 1 016-01160-0000 ADH SPBNDR #326 AR 1 016-01160-0001 ADHESIVE PRIMER N AR 1 016-01268-0000 LOCTITE 271 AR 1 016-01278-0007 LUBRICANT AR 1 025-00135-0000 WIRE 26AWG WHT-BLK IN 24 025-00135-0001 WIRE 26AWG WHT-RED IN 24 025-00135-0005 WIRE 26 AWG WHT-G IN 24 030-01444-0000 CONTACT EA 5 030-01453-0000 POLARIZING PLUG EA 1 047-10018-0002 FOLLOWER SCAN AXIS EA 1 047-10501-0001 COVER SCN SENS W/F EA 1 073-05178-0003 PIVOT BRK TOP W/H EA 1 078-02101-0000 SPRING TORSION EA 1 088-03137-0000 CABLE BUMPER EA 1 088-03147-0000 SLEEVE EA 1 089-02136-0000 NUT LOCK 2-56 EA 1 089-06491-0004 SCR SHC 2-56X1/4 EA 1 089-08076-0030 WSHR FLT STD .130 EA 1 089-08093-0030 WSHR FLT STD .094 EA 1 089-08335-0000 WSHR CURVED SPRING EA 1 150-00017-0010 TUBING SHRINK 24G IN 1 150-00020-0010 TUBING SHRINK 18G IN 23

34-40-11

Page 10091 June/2002

N
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE ART 2000

Page 10092 June/2002

34-40-11